Lexmark MX610 Series, XM3150 User Manual

XM3150

User's Guide

March 2014

Machine type(s):

7016

Model(s):

679

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents

Safety information.......................................................................................7

Learning about the printer...........................................................................9

Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9

Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10

Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11

Using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................................................................13

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................14

Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................14

Understanding the printer control panel....................................................15

Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................20

Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................20

Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................20

Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................20

Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................21

Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................21

Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................22

Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................22

Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................22

Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................23

Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................23

Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................24

Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................24

Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................25

Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................26

Additional printer setup.............................................................................27

Installing internal options........................................................................................................................27

Available internal options .................................................................................................................................27

Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................28

Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................29

Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................31

Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................32

Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................39

Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................42

2

Contents

Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................43

Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................43

Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................43

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................46

Installing the printer .........................................................................................................................................46

Adding available options in the print driver .....................................................................................................46

Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................46

Networking..............................................................................................................................................48

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................48

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................48

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................49

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup ....................................................50

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................51

Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP ...............................................................................51

Setting up serial printing (Windows only).........................................................................................................52

Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................52

Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................52

Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................52

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................53

Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................53

Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................53

Loading trays...........................................................................................................................................53

Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................58

Using the standard bin and paper stop...................................................................................................63

Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................64

Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................64

Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................64

Assigning a custom paper type .........................................................................................................................65

Configuring a custom name..............................................................................................................................65

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................67

Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................67

Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................69

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................72

Printing......................................................................................................77

Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................77

Printing from a flash drive or mobile device...........................................................................................78

Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................80

3

Contents

Printing information pages......................................................................................................................82

Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................82

Copying......................................................................................................84

Making copies.........................................................................................................................................84

Copying photos........................................................................................................................................85

Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................85

Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................86

Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................92

Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................92

Understanding the copy options.............................................................................................................93

E-mailing....................................................................................................95

Setting up the printer to e-mail...............................................................................................................95

Creating an e-mail shortcut.....................................................................................................................96

E-mailing a document..............................................................................................................................97

Customizing e-mail settings.....................................................................................................................98

Canceling an e-mail.................................................................................................................................99

Understanding the e-mail options..........................................................................................................99

Faxing......................................................................................................102

Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................102

Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................116

Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................118

Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................119

Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................121

Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................121

Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................122

Scanning...................................................................................................125

Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................125

Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................125

Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................127

Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................129

Understanding the printer menus............................................................132

4

Contents

Saving money and the environment.........................................................203

Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................203

Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................203

Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................203

Saving energy........................................................................................................................................204

Using Eco

‑

Mode..............................................................................................................................................204

Reducing printer noise....................................................................................................................................204

Adjusting Sleep mode .....................................................................................................................................205

Using Hibernate mode ....................................................................................................................................205

Setting Hibernate Timeout .............................................................................................................................205

Using Schedule Power Modes ........................................................................................................................206

Adjusting the brightness of the display ..........................................................................................................206

Recycling................................................................................................................................................207

Recycling Lexmark products ...........................................................................................................................207

Recycling Lexmark packaging..........................................................................................................................207

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................208

Securing the printer..................................................................................209

Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................209

Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................209

Erasing non

‑ volatile memory................................................................................................................210

Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................210

Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................211

Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................212

Maintaining the printer............................................................................213

Cleaning printer parts............................................................................................................................213

Cleaning the printer ........................................................................................................................................213

Cleaning the scanner glass..............................................................................................................................214

Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................215

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel......................................................... 215

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server .................................................215

Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................215

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies.....................................................................................................215

Ordering a toner cartridge..............................................................................................................................215

Ordering an imaging unit ................................................................................................................................216

Ordering staple cartridges ..............................................................................................................................216

Ordering a maintenance kit ............................................................................................................................216

Ordering an ADF separator roller ...................................................................................................................216

Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................216

5

Contents

Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................217

Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................217

Replacing the toner cartridge .........................................................................................................................217

Replacing the imaging unit .............................................................................................................................219

Replacing the staple cartridge ........................................................................................................................221

Moving the printer................................................................................................................................223

Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................223

Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................224

Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................224

Managing the printer...............................................................................225

Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................225

Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................225

Setting up e

‑ mail alerts.........................................................................................................................225

Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................225

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................226

Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................227

Clearing jams............................................................................................228

Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................228

Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................229

[x]

‑ page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................231

[x]

‑ page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx].............................................................................................231

[x]

‑ page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]..................................................................................................232

[x]

‑ page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]................................................................................................233

[x]

‑ page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]...........................................................................236

[x]

‑ page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]..........................................................................................237

[x]

‑ page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx].....................................................................................................238

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]...............................240

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................246

Notices.....................................................................................................309

Product information..............................................................................................................................309

Edition notice........................................................................................................................................309

Power consumption..............................................................................................................................313

Index........................................................................................................326

6

Safety information

Safety information

Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips, multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property damage, or potential fire.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.

You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.

• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Use only the telecommunications (RJ

‑

11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

7

Safety information 8

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters .

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for?

Initial setup instructions:

• Connecting the printer

• Installing the printer software

Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media

• Loading paper

• Configuring printer settings

• Viewing and printing documents and photos

• Setting up and using the printer software

• Configuring the printer on a network

• Caring for and maintaining the printer

• Troubleshooting and solving problems

Instructions for:

• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network

• Troubleshooting printer connection problems

Find it here

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at http://support.lexmark.com

.

User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide —The guides are available on the Documentation CD.

For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com

.

Help using the printer software

Networking Guide —Open the Software CD, and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking

Guide link.

Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help .

Click

?

to view context

‑ sensitive information.

Notes:

• Help is automatically installed with the printer software.

• The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.

9

Learning about the printer 10

What are you looking for?

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:

• Documentation

• Driver downloads

• Live chat support

• E

‑ mail support

• Voice support

Warranty information

Find it here

Lexmark Support Web site— http://support.lexmark.com

Note: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.

Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:

• Machine Type number

• Serial number

• Date purchased

• Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

• In the U.S.

—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or at http://support.lexmark.com

.

• In other countries and regions —See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer


When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.

• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee

156 standard.

• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.

• Keep the printer:

– Clean, dry, and free of dust.

– Away from stray staples and paper clips.

– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.

– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:


5

4 1

3

2

1 Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)

3 Left side 203.2 mm (8 in.)

4 Rear

5 Top

203.2 mm (8 in.)

800 mm (31.49 in.)

Printer configurations



11


Basic model

2

1

3

4

5

7

6

1 Display

2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

3 ADF tray

4 ADF bin

5 Standard bin

6 Multipurpose feeder

7 Standard 550

‑ sheet tray

Note: A lockable 550

‑ sheet tray is also available. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.

12


Configured model

1

3

2

1 Optional 250

‑ sheet tray

2 Optional 550

‑ sheet tray

3 Optional stapler

Using the Embedded Web Server

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

If the printer is installed on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following:

• View the virtual display of the printer control panel.

• Check the status of the printer supplies.

• Configure supply notifications.

• Configure printer settings.

• Configure network settings.

• View reports.

To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:

1 Obtain the printer IP address:

• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Notes:

– An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

– If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

13


3 Press Enter .

The Embedded Web Server page appears.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.

• Send a fax using the printer control panel.

• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.

• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.

• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

AB

C

14

Use the ADF for multiple

‑ page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single

‑ page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF

When using the ADF:

• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.

• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.

• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.

• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m 2 (14–32 lb).

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.

• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.

• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Understanding the printer control panel

Using the printer control panel

1

2

3

4

15

8 5

7

6

Use the

1 Display

To

• View the printer status and messages.

• Set up and operate the printer.

2 Home button

3 Sleep button

Go to the home screen.

Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:

• Press any hard button.

• Open a door or cover.

• Send a print job from the computer.

• Perform a power

‑ on reset (POR) with the main power switch.

• Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.

Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

4 Keypad

5 Indicator light

6 Start button

7 Cancel button

Check the status of the printer.

Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

Stop all printer activity.

8 Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights

The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Indicator light

Off

Blinking green

Printer status

The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.

The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Understanding the printer control panel 16

Indicator light

Solid green

Blinking red

Sleep button light

Off

Solid amber

Blinking amber

Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow, pulsing pattern

Printer status

The printer is on, but idle.

The printer requires user intervention.

Printer status

The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.

The printer is in Sleep mode.

The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.

The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

1 2 3 4 5

6

14

13

7

8

12 11 10 9

Touch To

1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop

‑ up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer.

2 Copy

3 Fax

Access the Copy menus and make copies.

4

5

E-mail

FTP

Access the Fax menus and send fax.

Access the E-mail menus and send e

‑ mails.

Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.

6 Arrows Scroll up or down.

7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.

8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.

Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.


Touch

9 Bookmarks

10 USB Drive

11 Held Jobs

12 Status/Supplies

13 Tips

14 Search held jobs

To

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.

Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any other application.

View, select, print, scan, or e

‑ mail photos and documents from a flash drive.

Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer.

Display all current held jobs.

• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.

• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Search for one or more of the following items:

• User name for held or confidential print jobs

• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs

• Profile names

• Bookmark container or print job names

• USB container or print job names for supported file types

Features

Feature

Menu trail line

Example:

Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >

Number of Copies

Attendance message alert

Description

A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu.

Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.

Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting.

If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.

Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Status message bar • Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy .

• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low .

• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.


Feature

Printer IP address

Example:

123.123.123.123

Description

The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch

1 Arrows

To

View a list of options.

2 Copy It Print a copy.

3 Advanced Options Select a copy option.

4 Home

5 Increase

6 Decrease

7 Tips

Go to the home screen.

Select a higher value.

Select a lower value.

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Other touch-screen buttons

Touch

Accept

To

Save a setting.

Understanding the printer control panel

Touch

Cancel

To

• Cancel an action or a selection.

• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.

19

Reset Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:

• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.

• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to www.lexmark.com

or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Finding the IP address of the computer

For Windows users

1 In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.

2 Type ipconfig , and then look for the IP address.

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network .

2 Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP .

3 Look for the IP address.

Finding the IP address of the printer

Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.

You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.

• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.

• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:

• From the printer control panel home screen



Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123

.


20

Setting up and using the home screen applications 21

3 Press Enter .

Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen


Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Do one or more of the following:

• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.

a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization .

b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.

Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.

c Click Submit .

• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Understanding the different applications

Use

Card Copy

Scan to E

‑ mail

To

Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy” on page 23 .

Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page

102 .

Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22 .

Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see

Multi Send” on page 24 .

“Setting up

MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut” on page 23 .

Scan a document, and then send it to an e

‑ mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on page 95 .

Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 128 .

Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see to an FTP address” on page 125 .

“Scanning

Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24 .


Activating the home screen applications

Finding information about the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the

Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 20 .

For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com

.

2 Click Software Solutions , and then select either of the following:

• Scan to Network —This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.

• Other Applications —This lets you find information about the other applications.

3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide , go to http://support.lexmark.com

.

Use To

Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.

Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.



2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites .

3 Click Add , and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.

• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20 .

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.

4 Click Apply .

To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.


Setting up Card Copy

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide , go to http://support.lexmark.com

.

Use To

Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet

‑ size cards.

You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information on the card in a more convenient manner.



2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy .

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.

• Default tray —Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.

• Default number of copies —Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application is used.

• Default contrast setting —Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.

• Default scale setting —Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).

• Resolution setting —Adjust the quality of the scanned card.

Notes:

– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for black and white.

– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and

300 dpi for black and white.

• Print Borders —Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.

4 Click Apply .

To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut


.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Use

24

To

Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or email jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut , and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send


.

Use To

Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.

Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.


Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send .

3 From the Profiles section, click Add , and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse

‑ over help beside each field for a description of the setting.

• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20 .

4 Click Apply .

To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Scan to Network

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To check for updates of this User's Guide , go to http://support.lexmark.com

.


Use To

Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.

Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.



2 Do either of the following:

• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here .

• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network .

3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.

Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.

• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20 .

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.

4 Click Apply .

To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.



2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings .

3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.

4 Click Submit .

To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet .


Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.



2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following: a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management .

b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.

c Click Configure , and then do either of the following:

• To export a configuration to a file, click Export , and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

Notes:

– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.

– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved.

• To import a configuration from a file, click Import , and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.

Notes:

– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.

– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply .

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following: a Click Settings > Import/Export .

b Do either of the following:

• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File , and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

• To import a configuration file, do the following:

1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File , and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.

2 Click Submit .

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options


Available internal options

• Memory card

– DDR3 DIMM

– Flash memory

• Fonts

• Firmware

Forms Barcode

Prescribe

IPDS

Printcryption

• Printer hard disk

• Lexmark TM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)

– Parallel 1284

‑

B interface

– MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface

– MarkNet N8350 802.11 b/g/n Wireless Print Server

– RS

‑

232

‑

C serial interface

27


Accessing the controller board


1 Open the controller board access door.

28

2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

1

2

3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.


4 3

1 Memory card connector

2 Option card connector

3 Printer hard disk connector

4 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector

4 Close the shield, and then the access door.

1

2

1

2

Installing a memory card



Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Note: An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.

1 Access the controller board.

For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 28 .

2 Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may cause damage.

29


3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

1

2

30

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .


Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.


Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controler board electronic components or connectors.



2 Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.

2

1

31


4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

32

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).

Note: This task requires a flat

‑ head screwdriver.




Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Open the controller board access door.

33

2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the access door, and then slide the access door to remove it.

1

2

3

3 Unpack the ISP kit.

Note: Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector.


6

1

2

5

4

1 ISP solution

2 Screw to attach the ISP to the bracket

3 ISP exterior cover

4 Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage

5 Plastic bracket

6 Long ISP cable

4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place.

3

34

5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket.

1 2


6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw.

35

7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution.


8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP.

36

9 Attach the ISP exterior cover at an angle by inserting the left hinges first.


10 Lower the rest of the cover, and then slide the cover to the right.

11 Run the ISP cable through the controller board shield.

37


12 Open the shield using the green handle.

1

2

13 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board.

Note: If you have installed a printer hard disk, then you need to remove it. For more information, see

“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 42 . To reinstall the printer hard disk, see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 39 .

38


14 Close the shield.

15 Close the ISP exterior cover.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .

Installing a printer hard disk






2 Unpack the printer hard disk.

3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

39

Additional printer setup a Using a flat

‑ head screwdriver, loosen the screws.

b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.

Note: The plug and the receptacle are color

‑ coded blue.

40

Additional printer setup 41 c Align the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket, and then slide the printer hard disk onto the brackets.

d Tighten the two screws.

4 Close the controller board shield, and then close the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .


Removing a printer hard disk





Note: This task requires a flat

‑ head screwdriver.

2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket.

42

3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.

4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges, and then remove it from the printer.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then close the access door.

Additional printer setup 43

Installing hardware options

Order of installation




Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:

• Printer stand

• Optional 250

‑ or 550

‑ sheet tray

• Printer

For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250

‑ or 550

‑ sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup sheet that came with the option.

Installing optional trays



CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters .

1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.


2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.

3 Pull out the tray from the base.

1

2

44

4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.

5 Insert the tray into the base.

6 Place the tray near the printer.

7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.

Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.


8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

2

1

Notes:

• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .

• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.


Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer

1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.

Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.

Adding available options in the print driver


1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8

From the Search charm, type run , and then navigate to:

Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier a Click , or click Start and then click Run .

b Type control printers .

c Press Enter , or click OK .

2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:

• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties .

• For earlier versions, select Properties .

3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now

‑

Ask Printer .

4 Apply the changes.


1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies .

2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.


Attaching cables

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.

46


Make sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer

• The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing or scanning. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

47

7

6

5

8

4

Use the

1 Printer power cord socket

2 Power switch

3 Ethernet port

4 EXT port

5

6

7

8

LINE port

USB port

USB printer port

Security slot

To

3

2 1

Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Turn the printer on or off.

Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.

Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.

Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ

‑

11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.

Attach a supported printer keyboard.

Connect the printer to a computer.

Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place.


Networking

Notes:

• Purchase a MarkNet TM N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.

For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter.

• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi

Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:

Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the printer.

• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network

• The network gateway

• The network mask

• A nickname for the printer (optional)

Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable.

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:

• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.

Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

• SSID —The SSID is also referred to as the network name.

• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode) —The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.

• Channel (for ad hoc networks) —The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.


• Security Method —There are four basic options for Security Method:

– WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

– 802.1X–RADIUS

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

• Authentication type

• Inner authentication type

• 802.1X user name and password

• Certificates

– No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

Notes:

– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact your system support person.

– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:

• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.

• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup

2 Select a wireless connection setup.


Use To

Search for networks Show available wireless connections.

Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.

Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.

Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.

Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup


• The access point (wireless router) is Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS

‑ compatible. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method


> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi

‑

Fi Protected

Setup > Start Push Button Method

2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method


> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi

‑

Fi Protected

Setup > Start PIN Method

2 Copy the eight

‑ digit WPS PIN.

3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.

Notes:

• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

5 Enter the eight

‑ digit PIN, and then save the setting.


Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server


• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.

• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.


Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.


2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless .

3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).

Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and channel.

4 Click Submit .

5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x] section, see if the status is Connected.

Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP

Notes:

• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.

• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.

• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network.


1 Open the printers folder.

2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.

3 Configure the port from the list.

4 Update the IP address.



1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP .

2 Type the IP address in the address field.



Setting up serial printing (Windows only)

After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer.

Note: Serial printing reduces print speed.

1 Set the parameters in the printer.

a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.

b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

c Save the settings.

2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.

3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.

4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.

Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt, and then type devmgmt.msc

.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page —Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.

Remove the option, and then install it again.

• Network setup page —If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected .

If the status is Not Connected , then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.

Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media 53

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 228 and “Storing paper” on page 72 .

Setting the paper size and type


> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Notes:

• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550

‑ sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.

• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.

• The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.

• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user

‑ defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).

• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).


> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height .

3 Select the width or height, and then touch .

Loading trays


1 Pull out the tray completely.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause a jam.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

1

LG LT

A4

EX

EC

B5

A5

2

A

5

B 5

E X

E C

LT

54


3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

55

1

LG

A4

EXE

C

B5

A5

A6

A

5

B 5

E X

E C

LT

R

2

A

4

Notes:

• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab backward to accommodate their length.

• When loading legal

‑ size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust.

To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more information, contact customer support.

• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab toward the center of the tray to the A6

‑ size position.

• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray.


LG

LTR

A4

EXE

B5

A5

A6

A

5

B5

EX

EC

LT

A 4

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

• There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not, and whether two sided printing is needed.


Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher

C

AB

AB

C

57

One

‑ sided printing

AB

C

One

‑ sided printing

C

AB

Two

‑ sided (duplex) printing Two

‑ sided (duplex) printing

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

LG

L

LTR

A4

EXE

C

B5

A5

A6

A

5

B 5

E X

E C

LT

R

A

4


6 Insert the tray.

58

7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single

‑ page print jobs on letterhead.

1 Open the multipurpose feeder.

1

2

Loading paper and specialty media a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

59


2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.

1

60

2

3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.

• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

• Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

4 Load the paper or specialty media.


Notes:

• Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.

• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

61

• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that the transparencies came in.

Note: When loading A6

‑ size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.


• Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two

‑ sided (duplex) printing, load letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.

62


• Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.

63

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self

‑ stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Using the standard bin and paper stop

The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20

‑ lb paper. It collects prints facedown. The standard bin includes a paper stop that keeps paper from sliding out the front of the bin as it stacks.

To open the paper stop, pull it so that it flips forward.

Note: Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location.


Linking and unlinking trays

The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.

Linking and unlinking trays


Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.


2 Click Settings > Paper Menu .

3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.

• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.

• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.

4 Click Submit .

Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 53 .

Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.

The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type



Notes:



2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names .

3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

4 Click Submit .

5 Click Custom Types , and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.




> Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

3 Touch .

4 Touch Custom Types , and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type


Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types .

3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑ defined custom names.

4 Click Submit .



> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑ defined custom names.

3 Touch .

Configuring a custom name



Notes:


65



2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types .

3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit .



> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch .

Paper and specialty media guide 67

Paper and specialty media guide

Notes:

• Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.

• Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.

• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.

• For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

.

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.

• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:

– “Loading trays” on page 53

– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 58

Tips on using transparencies

• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.

• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu, then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).

• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.

• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.

• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90

‑ g/m 2 (24

‑ lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All

‑ cotton envelopes must not exceed 75

‑ g/m 2 (20

‑ lb bond) weight.

• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.


• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

– Have excessive curl or twist

– Are stuck together or damaged in any way

– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing

– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars

– Have an interlocking design

– Have postage stamps attached

– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position

– Have bent corners

– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two

‑ sided labels are not supported.

For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available at http://support.lexmark.com

.

When printing on labels:

• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:

– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25

‑ psi (172

‑ kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

• Do not use labels with slick backing material.

• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties.

• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.

• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die

‑ cuts of the label.

• Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive should be at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2

‑ mm (0.06

‑ inches) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non

‑ oozing adhesive.

• Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.


Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single

‑ ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.

• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.

• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.

• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi

‑ liquid and volatile components into the printer.

• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Paper guidelines

Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90

‑ g/m 2 (24

‑ lb) bond grain long paper. The optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120

‑ g/m 2 (32

‑ lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163

60 g/m 2

‑ g/m 2 (43

‑ lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than

(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75

‑ g/m 2 (20

‑ lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended to use 90 g/m 2

(24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Two

‑ sided printing is supported only for 60–90

‑ g/m 2 (16–24

‑ lb) bond paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.


Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.

Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24–48 hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long , running the length of the paper, or grain short , running the width of the paper.

For 60–90

‑ g/m 2 (16–24

‑ lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high

‑ quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically

‑ treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater or lesser than +/

‑

2.5 mm

(+/

‑

0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms

In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:

• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

• Rough

‑ edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers

• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)

• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m 2 (16 lb)

• Multiple

‑ part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble

‑ free printing.

To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.

• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.


• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.

• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m 2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.

• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat

‑ resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation

‑ set or oil

‑ based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.

When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.

Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

• Low moisture content (4–5%)

• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)

Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)

• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m 2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).


Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.

• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.

• Store individual packages on a flat surface.

• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.

• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

Supported paper sizes

Paper size and dimension Standard

550

‑ sheet tray

Business card X

3 x 5

4 x 6

X

X

Optional 250

‑ or

550

‑ sheet tray

X

Multipurpose feeder

X

X

X

1

1

ADF

X

X

X

Scanner glass

Duplex printing

X

X

X

A4

210 x 297 mm

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A5

148 x 210 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A6

105 x 148 mm

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

X

X

X

X

Letter

215.9 x 279.4 mm

(8.5 x 11 in.)

1 Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal.

2 Paper is supported in two

‑ sided (duplex) printing only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at least

279.4 mm (11 in.). The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.

Paper and specialty media guide


550

‑ sheet tray

Legal

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184.2 x 266.7 mm

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Oficio (México)

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal 2

76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to

215.9 x 359.92 mm

(8.5 x 14.17 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

X

Optional 250

550

‑

X

‑ sheet tray or Multipurpose feeder

ADF

X

Scanner glass

Duplex printing

X

X

X

2

9 Envelope

98.4 x 226.1 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9.01 in.)

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X





73



550

‑ sheet tray

X Other Envelope

85.7 x 165 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(3.375 x 6.50 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

Optional 250

550

‑ sheet tray

X

‑ or Multipurpose feeder

ADF

X

Scanner glass

Duplex printing

X





Supported paper types and weights

Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at a reduced speed.

Paper type Standard

550

‑ sheet tray

250

‑ or

550

‑ sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder

Duplex mode ADF

Plain paper

X

X

Card stock

Transparencies

Recycled

Paper labels

Bond

X

X

X

X

X

1

Envelope 2

Rough envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper

Light paper

Heavy paper

X X

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250

‑ sheet tray.

2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

X

X

X

X

Scanner glass


Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the optional finisher

Supported paper sizes

Paper size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (México)

Folio

Statement

Universal

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

Dimensions

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)

148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.)

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.)

182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)

216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)

105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm

(4.13 x 8.5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)

98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.)

105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.)

110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.)

162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.)

176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)

98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to 176 x 250 mm

(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

Staple finisher

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Supported paper types and weights

Paper type

Plain paper

Card stock

Transparencies

Recycled

Paper labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough envelope

Staple finisher

X

X

X

X

75


Paper type

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper

Light paper

Heavy paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Staple finisher

76

Printing 77

Printing

Printing forms and a document

Printing forms

Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.

Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and

Favorites” on page 22 .


Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings


Printing a document

1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.

2 Send the print job:

For Windows users a With a document open, click File > Print .

b Click Properties , Preferences , Options , or Setup .

c Adjust the settings, if necessary.

d Click OK > Print .

For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup .

2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.

3 Click OK .

b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Print .

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the Print dialog and pop

‑ up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3 Click Print .

Adjusting toner darkness


Printing

Notes:



2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness .

3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit .



> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness

2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit .

Printing from a flash drive or mobile device

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel.

• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

78

Notes:

• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.

• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.

Printing 79

• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.

3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.

4 Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print .

Notes:

• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Printing from a mobile device

To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile .

Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Supported flash drives and file types

Notes:

• High

‑ speed USB flash drives must support the full

‑ speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.

• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology

File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

Printing 80

Recommended flash drives

• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)

• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)

• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)

File type

Documents:

• .pdf

• .xps

Images:

• .dcx

• .gif

• .jpeg or .jpg

• .bmp

• .pcx

• .tiff or .tif

• .png

• .fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer


> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type

Use

Max Invalid PIN

Confidential Job Expiration

Repeat Job Expiration

Verify Job Expiration

Reserve Job Expiration

To

Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.

Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 1–9.

Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.

Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.

Store print jobs for printing at a later time.

Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.

• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs .

Printing 81

2 Touch Submit .

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.


1 With a document open, click File > Print .

2 Click Properties , Preferences , Options , or Setup .

3 Click Print and Hold .

4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑ digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print .

6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print


1 With a document open, choose File > Print .

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop

‑ up menu, choose Job Routing .

3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑ digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print .

5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.

• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings


Notes:


Printing 82


2 Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup .

3 Modify the settings:

• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Click Submit to save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list


> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts .

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.


> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.

2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs .

Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Canceling a print job from the computer


1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.

2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

Printing


1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.

2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

83

Copying

Copying


AB

C


‑ page documents.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:


• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same.

3 From the printer control panel, press .

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.

Notes:



2 Adjust the paper guides.

84

Copying 85


Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.


Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page .

3 Touch Finish the Job .

Copying photos

1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.


Copy > Content > Photo >

3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.

4 Touch > Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next page .

5 Touch Finish the Job .

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies


Notes:




Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

Copying

3 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It

If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >

4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It .

Copying on letterhead


Notes:






4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It

5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead

6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It .

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size


Notes:






4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select a new size for the copy > > Copy It

86

Copying 87

Making copies using paper from a selected tray


Notes:






4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >

5 Touch Copy It .

Copying different paper sizes

Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes


Notes:





Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size


Notes:


Copying 88




Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Letter > > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)


Notes:





Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method

Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided original documents and you want two

‑ sided copies.

4 Touch > Copy It .

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.


Notes:




3 From the home screen, touch Copy .

Copying

4 From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.

Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

5 Touch Copy It .

Adjusting copy quality


Notes:





Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.

• Text —The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.

• Text/Photo —The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

• Photo —The original document is mostly a photo or an image.

• Graphics —The original document is mostly business

‑ type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

5 Touch .

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.

• Color Laser —The original document was printed using a color laser printer.

• Inkjet —The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

• Magazine —The original document is from a magazine.

• Press —The original document was printed using a printing press.

• Black/White Laser —The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.

• Photo/Film —The original document is a photo from a film.

• Newspaper —The original document is from a newspaper.

• Other —The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch > Copy It .

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

89

Copying 90

Collated Not collated


Notes:





Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies


Notes:





Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets

Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3

‑

1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1

‑

2,2,2,” then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on page 89 .

4 Select one of the following:

• Between Copies

• Between Jobs

• Between Pages

• Off

5 Touch > Copy It .

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple

‑ page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Copying 91

Notes:

• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.

• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.


Notes:





Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It

Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job

The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the same or different settings.

The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.

• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.

• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.

For example:


Notes:





Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It

Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch

Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed .

Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job .

Copying 92

Placing information on copies

Placing a header or footer on pages


Notes:



2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.


Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type of header or footer you want

4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done .

5 Touch , and then press .

Placing an overlay message on each page

An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and

Draft.


Notes:





Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF

When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass

From the home screen, touch Cancel Job .

Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

Copying 93

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.

2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs .

Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy options

Copy from

This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.

• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes .

• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense .

Copy to

This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.

• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.

• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder , and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.

• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.

Scale

This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic scaling.

• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal

‑ size to letter

‑ size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)

This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Copying 94

Collate

This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies

This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content

This option lets you set the original document type and source.

Select from the following content types:






Select from the following content sources:




• Brochure —The original document is from a brochure.


• Photo/Film —The original document is a photo from film.



Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging —This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,

Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the document.

• Custom Job —This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.

• Edge Erase —This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log —This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.

• Adjust ADF Skew —This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.

Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

E-mailing

E-mailing


AB

C

95


‑ page documents.


You can use the printer to e

‑ mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e

‑ mail from the printer. You can type the e

‑ mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function


Notes:



2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings .

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit .

Configuring e

‑

mail settings


Notes:



2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings .

E-mailing 96

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit .

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server


Notes:



2 Click Settings .

3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup .

4 Type a unique name for the e

‑ mail recipient, and then type the e

‑ mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma.

5 Click Add .

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel


E-mail > Recipient > type an e

‑ mail address

To create a group of recipients, touch Next address , and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.

2 Touch Subject , then type the e

‑ mail subject, and then touch Done .

3 Touch Message , then type your message, and then touch Done .

4 Adjust the e

‑ mail settings.

Note: If you change the settings after the e

‑ mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch .

6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done .

7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK .

If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel , and then reenter the information.

Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.

• You can use the shortcut when e

‑ mailing another document using the same settings.

E-mailing 97

E-mailing a document

You can use the printer to e

‑ mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e

‑ mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22 .

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel


Notes:




Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same.


E-mail > Recipient(s)

4 Type the e

‑ mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.

Notes:

• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address , and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.

• You can also enter an e

‑ mail address using the address book.

5 Touch Done > Send It .

Sending an e

‑

mail using a shortcut number


Notes:




3 Press # , then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address , and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add.

4 Touch Send It .

E-mailing

Sending an e

‑

mail using the address book


Notes:





E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address , and then enter the address or shortcut number that you want to add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done .

Customizing e-mail settings

Adding e-mail subject and message information


Notes:





E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e

‑ mail address > Done

4 Touch Subject , then type the e

‑ mail subject, and then touch Done .

5 Touch Message , then type your message, and then touch Done .

Changing the output file type


Notes:




98

E-mailing 99


E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e

‑ mail address > Done > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.

• PDF —Create a single file with multiple pages.

• Secure PDF —Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.

• TIFF —Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded

Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG —Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.

• XPS —Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet

Explorer

‑ hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third

‑ party standalone viewer.

5 Touch > Send It .

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.

• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /

Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options

Recipient(s)

This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e

‑ mail addresses.

Subject

This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message

This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name

This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e

‑ mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed

Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter

‑ and legal

‑ size pages).

E-mailing 100

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.

Select one of the following:

• PDF —Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.

Note: PDF is the factory default setting.

• Secure PDF —Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.

• TIFF —Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the

Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG —Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.

• XPS —Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

















E-mailing 101

Page Setup

This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex) —This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.

This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation —This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and

Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding —This specifies if the original document is bound on the long

‑ edge or short

‑ edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.




Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you e

‑ mail the document.


• Edge Erase —This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.




Faxing

Faxing

Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.


AB

C

102


‑ page documents.


Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Note: The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.

During the initial printer setup, clear the Fax function and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch

Continue .

Note: The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Faxing 103

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on page 315 .

To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web

Server and then enter the Settings menu.

Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start

‑ up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.

1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following: a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit .

2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit .

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup .

3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit .

Faxing

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

104

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).

• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want.

Faxing

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

105

PHONE

LINE

To connect:



3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.

Faxing

Connected to different wall jacks

106

PHONE LINE

To connect:




• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically

(Auto Answer On).

• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call.

• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

Faxing

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

107

02

To connect:



3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.


• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually

(Auto Answer Off).

When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax.

• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Faxing

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

108

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.

To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.

To install a filter for the printer:

1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.

2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter.

3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.

4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Faxing

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

109

To connect:

1 Connect one end of a telephone cable to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.

The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. You may need to pay extra to your VoIP provider if you want to activate the second phone port.

3 Remove the protective plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.


• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay extra, then do not plug the printer into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port , and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

110

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.

Notes:

• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line

1 or Phone Port , and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

111

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs

Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

Faxing

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

112

There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.

Part name

Lexmark adapter plug

Part number

40X8519

Faxing

Connecting the printer to a non

‑

RJ

‑

11 wall jack

113

LINE

EXT

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ

‑

11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device has a non

‑

RJ

‑

11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:

• The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from the port of the printer.

• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Faxing 114

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The

F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

N F N

PHONE

LINE

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ

‑

11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

Faxing 115

3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as shown.

Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.

Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch .

Setting the outgoing fax name and number


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup .

3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit .

Faxing 116

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.


Notes:



2 Click Security > Set Date and Time .

3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.

4 Click Submit .

Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:


Notes:



2 Click Security > Set Date and Time .

3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time

Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit .

Sending a fax

You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e

‑ mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22 .

Sending a fax using the printer control panel


Notes:




Faxing 117

3 From the home screen, touch Fax .

4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.

Note: To add recipients, touch Next number , and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.

5 Touch Fax It .

Sending a fax using the computer

1 With a document open, click File > Print .

2 Select the printer, and then click Properties , Preferences , Options , or Setup .

3 Navigate to:

Fax > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers.

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.

6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation, and then apply the changes.

Notes:

• The fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, go to http://support.lexmark.com

.

• The fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it can be used.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number

Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.


Notes:




3 From the printer control panel, press # , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

4 Touch Fax It .

Sending a fax using the address book

The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the address book feature, contact your system support person.


Faxing

Notes:





Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search

Note: You can search only for one name at a time.

4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It .

Sending a fax at a scheduled time


Notes:





Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send

Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the fax queue.

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .

The time is increased or decreased in 30

‑ minute increments.

5 Touch Fax It .

Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.


Notes:


118

Faxing


2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup .

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

Notes:

• To create a multiple

‑ number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.

• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4 Assign a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add .

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Fax , and then enter the fax number.

Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number , and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch .

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done .

4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK .

Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel , and then reenter the information.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution


Notes:





Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.

Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).

5 Touch Fax It .

119

Faxing 120

Making a fax lighter or darker


Notes:





Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It .

Viewing a fax log


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Reports .

3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log .

Blocking junk faxes


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax .

Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.

• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Faxing 121

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.

• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while

Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory

1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs .

The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.

Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs .

The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes

This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes .

3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:

• Off

• Always On

• Manual

• Scheduled

4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps: a Click Fax Holding Schedule .

b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes .

Faxing 122 c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.

d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.

5 Click Add .

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e

‑ mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Fax Settings .

3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print , Print and Forward , or Forward .

4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax , E

‑ mail , FTP , LDSS , or eSF .

5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6 Click Submit .

Understanding the fax options

Content

This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
















Faxing 123

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.


• Standard —Use this when faxing most documents.

• Fine 200 dpi —Use this when faxing documents with small prints.

• Super fine 300 dpi —Use this when faxing documents with fine details.

• Ultra fine 600 dpi —Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Delayed Send

This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Page Setup


• Sides (Duplex) —This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).

This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.




‑ edge or short

‑ edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.




• Advanced Imaging —This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,

Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.



Faxing




124

Scanning 125

Scanning

Using Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 24 .

Scanning to an FTP address

Creating shortcuts

Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server


Notes:



2 Navigate to:

Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3 Enter the appropriate information.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

4 Enter a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add .

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel


FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK .

Scanning

Notes:

• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel , and then reenter the information.

• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel


Notes:





FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number


Notes:




3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch > Send It .

Scanning an FTP using the address book


Notes:





FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search

126

Scanning

4 Touch the name of the recipient.

Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search , and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch > Send It .

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

ADF Scanner glass

127

AB

C


‑ page documents.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server


Notes:



2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile .

3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next .

4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.

5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.

Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit .

Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.

Scanning

7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:



b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

c Do either of the following:

• Press # , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

• From the home screen, navigate to:

Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list

Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.

8 View the file from the computer.

Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer

Notes:

• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.

• Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.

Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.

2 Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.

3 From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It .

Scanning to a flash drive


Notes:




3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.

Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive .

Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.

5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It .

128

Scanning 129

Using the ScanBack Utility

You can use the Lexmark ScanBack TM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan

‑ to

‑ computer profiles.

The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

.

1 Set up your scan

‑ to

‑ computer profile: a Launch the ScanBack Utility.

b Select the printer.

If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create.

d Assign a file name of your scan profile, and then specify a location on your computer.

e Click Finish .

A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

Note: You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop.

2 Scan your original documents: a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass.

b From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Held jobs > Profiles and Apps > select your scan profile

Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding the scan options

FTP

This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.


File Name

This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut

This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number.

Original Size

This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter

‑ and legal

‑ size pages).

Scanning 130

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As

This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.


• PDF —Use to create a single file with multiple pages.

• Secure PDF —Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.

• TIFF —Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG —Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.

• XPS —Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content

















Scanning 131

Page Setup


• Sides (Duplex) —This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.




‑ edge or short

‑ edge side.

Scan Preview

This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.





Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you scan the document.




• Multifeed Sensor —This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an error message.


Understanding the printer menus

Understanding the printer menus

Menus list

Paper Menu

Default Source

Paper Size/Type

Configure MP

Substitute Size

Paper Texture

Paper Weight

Paper Loading

Custom Types

Custom Names 1

Custom Scan Sizes

Universal Setup

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Stapler Test

Network Setup Page 1

Network [x] Setup Page

Shortcut List

Fax Job Log

Fax Call Log

Copy Shortcuts

E

‑ mail Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Profiles List

Print Fonts

Print Directory

Print Demo

Asset Report

Network/Ports

Active NIC

Standard Network 2

Standard USB

Parallel [x]

Serial [x]

SMTP Setup

Security

Edit Security Settings

Miscellaneous Security

Settings

Confidential Print Menu

Erase Temporary Data

Files

Security Audit Log

Set Date and Time

Settings

General Settings

Copy Settings

Fax Settings

E

‑ mail Settings

FTP Settings

Flash Drive Menu

Print Settings

Help

Print All Guides

Copy Guide

E

‑ mail Guide

Fax Guide

FTP Guide

Print Defects Guide

Information Guide

Supplies Guide

Manage Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

E-mail Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Copy Shortcuts

Profile Shortcuts

Option Card Menu 3

A list of installed DLEs

(Download Emulators) appears.

1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.

2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

3 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

132

Understanding the printer menus 133

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use

Default Source

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

To

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose

Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use

Tray [x] Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS

‑

B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

• The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.


Use

Tray [x] Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Multipurpose Feeder Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

•

•

•

Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.

If available, a user

Notes:

‑ defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].

Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.

Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

• default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for Multipurpose

Feeder Size to appear as a menu.

The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.

Make sure to set the paper size value.



Use

Multipurpose Feeder Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Manual Paper Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

To

Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for Multipurpose

Feeder Type to appear as a menu.

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.



Use

Manual Paper Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Manual Envelope Size

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the paper type being manually loaded.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper

Type to appear as a menu.

Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.

Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.

Manual Envelope Type

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Custom Type [x]

Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.


Configure MP menu

Use

Configure MP

Cassette

Manual

First

To

Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual

‑ feed print jobs.

• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.


Substitute Size menu

Use

Substitute Size

Off

Statement/A5

Letter/A4

All Listed

To

Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.

Notes:

• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.

• Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.

• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use

Plain Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Card Stock Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Transparency Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Recycled Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Labels Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Bond Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Envelope Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.

• The options appear only if card stock is supported.

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.


137


Use

Rough Envelope Texture

Rough

Letterhead Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Preprinted Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Colored Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Light Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Heavy Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Rough/Cotton Texture

Rough

Custom [x] Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.


Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:


• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Use

Plain Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Card Stock Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.


138


Use

Transparency Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Recycled Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Labels Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Bond Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Rough Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Letterhead Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Preprinted Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Colored Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Light Weight

Light

Heavy Weight

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.


Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.

Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.

139


Use

Rough/Cotton Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Custom [x] Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.


Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:


• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use

Card Stock Loading

Duplex

Off

Recycled Loading

Duplex

Off

Labels Loading

Duplex

Off

Bond Loading

Duplex

Off

Letterhead Loading

Duplex

Off

Preprinted Loading

Duplex

Off

Colored Loading

Duplex

Off

Light Loading

Duplex

Off

Notes:

To

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Card Stock as the paper type.


Recycled as the paper type.


Labels as the paper type.


Bond as the paper type.


Letterhead as the paper type.


Preprinted as the paper type.


Colored as the paper type.


Light as the paper type.

• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.

• Duplex sets the printer default to two

‑ sided printing for every print job unless one

‑ sided printing is selected from

Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

140


Use

Heavy Loading

Duplex

Off

Rough/Cotton Loading

Duplex

Off

Custom [x] Loading

Duplex

Off

To


Heavy as the paper type.


Rough or Cotton as the paper type.


Custom [x] as the paper type.

Note: Custom [x] Loading appears only when the custom type is supported.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.

• Duplex sets the printer default to two

‑ sided printing for every print job unless one

‑ sided printing is selected from

Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Custom Types menu

Use

Custom Type [x]

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Rough/Cotton

Labels

Envelope

Recycled

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Rough/Cotton

Labels

Envelope

Notes:

To

Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user

‑ defined custom name created from the

Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision TM Professional.

Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.

• Paper is the factory default setting.

• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Use

Custom Name [x]

To

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in the printer menus.


Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use

Custom Scan Size [x]

Scan Size Name

Width

Height

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

2 scans per side

Off

On

142

To

Specify a custom scan size name and page orientation.

Notes:

• The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.

• ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,

5, and 6.

• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.

• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.

• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.

• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu

Use

Units of Measure

Inches

Millimeters

Portrait Width

3–14.17 inches

76–360 mm

Portrait Height

3–14.17 inches

76–360 mm

To

Identify the units of measure.

Notes:

• Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.

• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.

Set the portrait width.

Notes:

• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.

• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the width in 0.01

‑ inch increments.

• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the width in 1

‑ mm increments.

Set the portrait height.

Notes:

• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.

• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the height in 0.01

‑ inch increments.

• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the height in 1

‑ mm increments.


Use

Feed Direction

Short Edge

Long Edge

143

To

Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.

Notes:

• Short Edge is the factory default setting.

• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports Menu

Reports menu

Use

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Network Setup Page

Network [x] Setup Page

Shortcut List

Fax Job Log

Fax Call Log

Copy Shortcuts

E

‑ mail Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Profiles List

Print Fonts

To

Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.

Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number of printed pages.

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers.

Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer, such as the TCP/IP address information.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.

Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.

Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax

Settings menu.

Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.

Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax

Settings menu.

Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about e

‑ mail shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.

Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.

Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.


Use

Print Directory

Asset Report

To

Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk.

Notes:

• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.

• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and installed correctly.

Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use

Active NIC

Auto

[list of available network cards]

To

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.

• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.

• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:


• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.


Use

NPA Mode

Off

Auto

Network Buffer

Auto

3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

Standard Network Setup or

Network [x] Setup

Reports

Network Card

TCP/IP

IPv6

Wireless

AppleTalk

To

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:


• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the size of the network input buffer.

Notes:


• The value can be changed in 1KB increments.

• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:


• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Display and set the printer network settings.

Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.

Reports menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports

Use To

Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.


Network Card menu


• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Use

View Card Status

Connected

Disconnected

View Card Speed

Network Address

UAA

LAA

Job Timeout

0–255 seconds

To

View the connection status of the network card.

View the speed of an active network card.

View the network addresses.

Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.

Notes:

• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.

• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.

• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

TCP/IP menu


• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Use

Set Hostname

IP Address

Netmask

Gateway

Enable DHCP

On

Off

Enable RARP

On

Off

To

Set the current TCP/IP host name.

Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

View or change the current TCP/IP address.

Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

146


Use

Enable BOOTP

On

Off

Enable AutoIP

Yes

No

Enable FTP/TFTP

Yes

No

Enable HTTP Server

Yes

No

WINS Server Address

Enable DDNS

Yes

No

Enable mDNS

Yes

No

DNS Server Address

Backup DNS Server Address

Backup DNS Server Address 2

Backup DNS Server Address 3

Enable HTTPS

Yes

No

To

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.


Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer

Protocol.


Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.


View or change the current WINS server address.

View or change the current DDNS setting.


View or change the current mDNS setting.


View or change the current DNS server address.

View or change the backup DNS server addresses.

View or change the current HTTPS setting.


IPv6 menu


• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Use

Enable IPv6

On

Off

To

Enable IPv6 in the printer.



Use

Auto Configuration

On

Off

View Hostname

View Address

View Router Address

Enable DHCPv6

On

Off

To

Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.


Set the host name.

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web

Server.

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.


Wireless menu

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network adapter attached.


• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Use

Wi

‑

Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Start Push Button Method

Start PIN Method

Enable/Disable WPS Auto

‑ detection

Enable

Disable

Network Mode

BSS Type

Infrastructure

Ad hoc

Compatibility

802.11b/g

802.11b/g/n

Choose Network

View Signal Quality

To

Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security.

Notes:

• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point

(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.

• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point.

Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with

WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.

Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

Specify the network mode.

Notes:

• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer access a network using an access point.

• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

Select an available network for the printer to use.

View the quality of the wireless connection.


Use

View Security Mode

To

View the encryption method for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu

Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional wireless network adapter is installed.


• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk

• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Use

Activate

Yes

No

View Name

To

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.


View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web

Server.

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.

Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web

Server.

Set Zone

[list of zones available on the network]

Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.

Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:


• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to

Off.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:


• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.


Use

NPA Mode

On

Off

Auto

USB Buffer

Disabled

Auto

3K to [maximum size allowed]

Job Buffering

Off

On

Auto

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

ENA Address yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

ENA Netmask yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

To

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the size of the USB input buffer.

Notes:


• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.

• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.

• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.

• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:


• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

Set the network address information for an external print server.

Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Set the netmask information for an external print server.



Use

ENA Gateway yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

151

To

Set the gateway information for an external print server.


SMTP Setup menu

Use

Primary SMTP Gateway

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

SMTP Timeout

5–30

Reply Address

Use SSL

Disabled

Negotiate

Required

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required

Login/Plain

CRAM

‑

MD5

Digest

‑

MD5

NTLM

Kerberos 5

To

Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e

‑ mail.

Note: 30 is the factory default setting.

Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.

Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the

SMTP server.

Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.

• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if

SSL will be used.

Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e

‑ mail privileges.

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.


Use

Device

‑

Initiated E

‑ mail

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

User

‑

Initiated E

‑ mail

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and Password

Use Session E

‑ mail address and Password

Prompt user

Device Userid

Device password

Kerberos 5 Realm

NTLM Domain

To

Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Device

‑

Initiated E

‑ mail and

User

‑

Initiated E

‑ mail.

• “Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the

SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Security menu

Edit Security Setups menu

Note: This menu appears only in select touch

‑ screen printer models.

Use

Edit Backup Password

Use Backup Password

• Off

• On

Password

Edit Building Blocks

Internal Accounts

NTLM

Simple Kerberos Setup

Kerberos Setup

Active Directory

LDAP

LDAP+GSSAPI

Password

PIN

Edit Security Templates

[list of available templates]

To

Create a backup password.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”

• This menu appears only if a backup password exists.

Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,

Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.

Add or edit a security template.


Use

Edit Access Controls

Administrative Menus

Function Access

Management

Solutions

Cancel jobs at the Device

To

Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access points.

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use

Login Restrictions

Login failures

Failure time frame

Lockout time

Panel Login Timeout

Remote Login Timeout

Security Reset Jumper

No Effect

Access controls=“No Security”

Reset factory security defaults

To

Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out.

Notes:

• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the factory default setting.

• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.

• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout time.

• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.

• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 120 minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.

Adjust the security settings.

Notes:

• No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration.

• Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the user has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.

• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous

Security menu.


Use

LDAP Certificate Verification

Demand

Try

Allow

Never

Minimum PIN Length

1–16

To

Allow the user to request a server certificate.

Notes:

• “Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately.

• “Try ” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session is terminated immediately.

• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.

• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.

Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).


Confidential Print menu

Use

Max Invalid PIN

Off

2–10

To

Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Notes:

• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.

Notes:

• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.

• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are deleted.

Repeat Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.



Use

Verify Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

To

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.

Reserve Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.


Erase Temporary Data Files menu

Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.

Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

Use

Wiping Mode

Auto

Automatic Method

Single pass

Multiple pass

To

Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.

Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.

Notes:

• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.

• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.

• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass method.

Security Audit Log menu

Use

Export Log

To

Let an authorized user export the audit log.

Notes:

• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.

• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer.


Use

Delete Log

Yes

No

Configure Log

Enable Audit

Yes

No

Enable Remote Syslog

No

Yes

Remote Syslog Facility

0–23

Severity of events to log

0–7

Set Date/Time menu

Use

Current Date and Time

Manually Set Date and Time

Time Zone

Automatically Observe DST

On

Off

Custom Time Zone Setup

DST Start Week

DST Start Day

DST Start Month

DST Start Time

DST End Week

DST End Day

DST End Month

DST End Time

DST Offset

Enable NTP

On

Off

NTP Server

To

Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.


Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.

Notes:

• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.

• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.

• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.

• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

To

View the current date and time settings for the printer.

Enter the date and time.

Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.

Select the time zone.

Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.

Enable the user to set up the time zone.

Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.


View the NTP server address.


Use

Enable Authentication

On

Off

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use

Display Language

English

Francais

Deutsch

Italiano

Espanol

Dansk

Norsk

Nederlands

Svenska

Portuguese

Suomi

Russian

Polski

Greek

Magyar

Turkce

Cesky

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

Korean

Japanese

Show Supply Estimates

Show estimates

Do not show estimates

To

Change the authentication setting to On or Off.


To

Set the language of the text appearing on the display.

Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may need to install special hardware for some languages.

View the estimates of the supplies on the control panel, Embedded

Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.

Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.


Use

Eco-Mode

Off

Energy

Energy/Paper

Paper

ADF Loaded Beep

Enabled

Disabled

Quiet Mode

Off

On

Run Initial setup

Yes

No

158

To

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its factory default settings.

• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.

• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power, paper, and specialty media.

• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job.

Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.

Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.

Minimize the printer noise.


Run the setup wizard.


Use

Keyboard

Keyboard Type

English

Francais

Francais Canadien

Deutsch

Italiano

Espanol

Greek

Dansk

Norsk

Nederlands

Svenska

Suomi

Portuguese

Russian

Polski

Swiss German

Swiss French

Korean

Magyar

Turkce

Cesky

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

Japanese

Custom Key [x]

Paper Sizes

US

Metric

Scan to PC Port Range

[port range]

To

Specify a language and custom key information for the display keyboard.

159

Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.

Notes:

• US is the factory default setting.

• The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.

Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall.

Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.


Use

Displayed Information

Left side

Right side

Custom Text [x]

Displayed Information (continued)

Black Toner

Displayed Information (continued)

Paper Jam

Load Paper

Service Errors

160

To

Specify what is displayed in the upper corners of the home screen.

For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following options:

None

IP Address

Hostname

Contact Name

Location

Date/Time mDNS/DDNS Service Name

Zero Configuration Name

Custom Text [x]

Model Name

Notes:

• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.

• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.

Customize the displayed information for supplies.

Select from the following options:

When to display

Do not display

Display

Message to display

Default

Alternate

Default

[text entry]

Alternate

[text entry]

Note: “Do not display” is the factory default setting for When to display.

Customize the displayed information for certain menus.

Select from the following options:

Display

Yes

No

Message to display

Default

Alternate

Default

[text entry]

Alternate

[text entry]

Note: No is the factory default setting for Display.


Use

Home screen customization

Change Language

Copy

Copy Shortcuts

Fax

Fax Shortcuts

E

‑ mail

E

‑ mail Shortcuts

FTP

FTP Shortcuts

Search Held Jobs

Held Jobs

USB Drive

Profiles and Apps

Bookmarks

Jobs by user

Forms and Favorites

Card Copy

Scan to Network

MyShortcut

Multi Send

Date Format

MM

‑

DD

‑

YYYY

DD

‑

MM

‑

YYYY

YYYY

‑

MM

‑

DD

Time Format

12 hour A.M./P.M.

24 hour clock

Screen Brightness

20–100

One Page Copy

Off

On

Output Lighting

Normal/Standby Mode

Off

Dim

Bright

To

Change the icons that appear on the home screen.

For each icon, select from the following options:

Display

Do not display

161

Format the date.

Note: MM

‑

DD

‑

YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-MM-

YYYY is the international factory default setting.

Format the time.

Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.

Specify the brightness of the display.


Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.


Set the amount of light from the standard bin.

Notes:

• Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper.

• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper.


Use

Audio Feedback

Button Feedback

On

Off

Volume

1–10

Show Bookmarks

Yes

No

Allow Background Removal

On

Off

Allow Custom Job Scans

On

Off

Scanner Jam Recovery

Job level

Page level

Web Page Refresh Rate

30–300

Contact Name

Location

Alarms

Alarm Control

Cartridge Alarm

Staple Alarm

162

To

Set the audio volume for the buttons.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.

• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.


Specify whether image background removal is allowed.


Scan multiple jobs to one file.

Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the

Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.

Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF.

Notes:

• Job level is the factory default setting. If Job level is selected, then rescan the entire job.

• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page forward.

Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes.


Specify a contact name for the printer.

Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Specify the location.

Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Set an alarm to sound when operator intervention is required.

For each alarm type, select from the following options:

Off

Single

Continuous

Notes:

• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This sounds several quick beeps.

• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and

Staple Alarm.

• Continuous repeats several quick beeps in a regular interval.


Use

Timeouts

Standby Mode

Disabled

1–240

Timeouts

Sleep Mode

Disabled

1–120

163

To

Set the amount of time before the printer enters a lower power state.

Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.

Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Notes:

• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.

• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm

‑ up times.

• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room.

• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm

‑ up time.

• Disabled appears only if Energy Conserve is set to Off.

Print a job while the display is off.

Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.

Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.

Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.

Timeouts

Print with Display Off

Allow printing with display off

Display on when printing

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout

Disabled

20 minutes

1–3 hours

6 hours

1–3 days

1–2 weeks

1 month

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout on Connection

Hibernate

Do Not Hibernate

Timeouts

Screen Timeout

15–300

Timeouts

Prolong Screen Timeout

On

Off

Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active Ethernet or phone connection.

Note: Hibernate is the factory default setting.

Set the amount of time the printer waits before returning the display to Ready state.


Continue a specified job without returning to the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.



Use

Timeouts

Print Timeout

Disabled

1–255

Timeouts

Wait Timeout

Disabled

15–65535

Timeouts

Job Hold Timeout

5–255

Error Recovery

Auto Reboot

Reboot when idle

Reboot always

Reboot never

Error Recovery

Max Auto Reboots

1–20

Print Recovery

Auto Continue

Disabled

5–255

164

To

Set the amount of time the printer waits to receive an end

‑ of

‑ job message before canceling the rest of the print job.

Notes:


• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed.

• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.

Set the amount of time the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job.

Notes:


• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using

PostScript emulation.

Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.

Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.

• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.

Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.

Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform.

Notes:


• When the number of reboots equals the specified value, then the error message appears.

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period.

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.


Use

Print Recovery

Jam Recovery

On

Off

Auto

Print Recovery

Jam Assist

On

Off

Print Recovery

Page Protect

Off

On

Press Sleep Button

Do Nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Press and Hold Sleep Button

Do Nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Factory Defaults

Do Not Restore

Restore Now

Export Configuration File

Export

165

To

Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.

• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.

• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.

Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.


Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

• On sets the printer to print the entire page.

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.

Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep button.

Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.

Use the printer factory default settings.

Notes:

• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.

• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.

Export configuration files to a flash drive.


Copy Settings menu

Use

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided to 1 sided

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

To

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Specify how the original document was produced.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

166

Specify whether an original document is two

‑ sided (duplex) or one

‑ sided, and then specify whether the copy should be two

‑ sided or one

‑ sided.

Notes:

• 1 sided to 1 sided —The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side.

• 1 sided to 2 sided —The original document has print on one side, while the copy will have print on both sides.

• 2 sided to 1 sided —The original document has print on both sides, while the copy will have print on just one side.

• 2 sided to 2 sided —The original document has print on both sides, and the copy will also have print on both sides.

Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.


Paper Saver

Off

2

‑ up Portrait

4

‑ up Portrait

2

‑ up Landscape

4

‑ up Landscape

Print Page Borders

On

Off

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

Staple

Off

On

Specify whether or not a border is printed.


Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.

Enable or disable the staple finisher.

Notes:


• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.


Use

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Custom Scan Size [x]

Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

ID Card

Copy To Source

Tray [x]

Auto Size Match

Multipurpose Feeder

Transparency Separators

On

Off

Separator Sheets

Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Darkness

1–9

Number of Copies

1–999

To

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.

• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Specify the paper source for copy jobs.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.


Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.


Specify the paper source for separator sheet.


Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.


Specify the number of copies for the copy job.


167


Use

Header/Footer

[Location]

Off

Date/Time

Page number

Custom text

Print on

All pages

First page only

All but first page

Custom text

Overlay

Confidential

Copy

Draft

Urgent

Custom

Off

Custom Overlay

Allow priority copies

On

Off

Custom Job scanning

On

Off

Allow Save as Shortcut

On

Off

Background Removal

‑

4 to 4

Auto Center

Off

On

To

Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.

For the location, select from the following options:

• Top left

• Top middle

• Top right

• Bottom left

• Bottom middle

• Bottom right

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for the location.

• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.


Specify the custom overlay text.

Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.

Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.


Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.

Notes:



Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.


Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.


Automatically align the content at the center of the page.


168


Use

Color Dropout

Color Dropout

None

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255

Default Green Threshold

0–255

Default Blue Threshold

0–255

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑

4 to 4

Adjust ADF Skew

Auto

Off

On

Scan edge to edge

Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Sample Copy

Off

On

Fax Settings menu

To

Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.

• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Specify the contrast used for the copy job.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Create a mirror image of the original document.


Create a negative image of the original document.


Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.


Correct slight skew in the scanned image.


Specify if the original document is scanned edge

‑ to

‑ edge prior to faxing.


Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.


Create a sample copy of the original document.


Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

Note: The fax function is available only in select printer models.


Use

Fax Name

Fax Number

Fax ID

Fax Name

Fax Number

Enable Manual Fax

On

Off

Memory Use

All receive

Mostly receive

Equal

Mostly send

All send

170

To

Specify the name of the fax in the printer.

Specify the number assigned to the fax.

Specify how the fax is identified.

Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.

Notes:


• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.

• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.

Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.

Notes:

• Equal is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.

• “Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.

• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.

• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.

Note: Allow is the factory default setting.

Specify the type of caller ID being used.

Cancel Faxes

Allow

Don't Allow

Caller ID

Off

Primary

Alternate

Fax number masking

Off

From left

From right

Digits to Mask

0–58

Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.

Notes:


• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting.

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.



Use

Fax Cover Page

Fax Cover Page

Off by default

On by default

Never use

Always use

Include to Field

On

Off

Include from Field

On

Off

From

Include Message Field

On

Off

Message

Include Logo

On

Off

Include Footer [x]

On

Off

Footer [x]

Use

Resolution

Standard

Fine 200 dpi

Super Fine 300 dpi

Ultra Fine 600 dpi

To

Configure the fax cover page.

Notes:

• “Off by default” is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.

• Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.

171

To

Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.

Note: Standard is the factory default setting.


Use

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5


Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long edge

Short edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.

Notes:


• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).


Note: Text is the factory default setting.

172

To


Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Darkness

1–9

Dial Prefix



Lighten or darken the output.


Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.


Use

Dialing Prefix Rules

Prefix Rule [x]

Automatic Redial

0–9

Redial frequency

1–200

Behind a PABX

Yes

No

Enable ECM

Yes

No

Enable Fax Scans

On

Off

Driver to fax

Yes

No


On

Off

Dial Mode

Tone

Pulse

Max Speed

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600


On

Off

173

To

Establish a dialing prefix rule.

Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.


Specify the number of minutes between redials.


Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.


Fax files that are scanned at the printer.


Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.


Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.


Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or as a pulse.

Note: Tone is the factory default setting.

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.


Scan Preview

On

Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.

Notes:



Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Notes:




Use


‑

4 to 4

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑

4 to 4

To

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.


Specify the contrast in the scanned image.






Adjust ADF Skew

Auto

Off

On

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.


Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.

Notes:


Off

On

Sharpness

‑

1–5

Temperature

4 to 4

Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono

Faxes

On

Off


• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.

Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to

‑ edge prior to faxing.


Adjust the sharpness of a fax.


Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.


Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.


Use

Enable Fax Receive

On

Off

Fax Job Waiting

None

Toner

Toner and Supplies

Rings to Answer

1–25

To

Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.


Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.


174


Use

Auto Reduction

On

Off

Paper Source

Auto

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Sides (Duplex)

Off

On


Off

Before Job

After Job


Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Fax Footer

On

Off

Max Speed

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

Fax Forwarding

Print

Print and Forward

Forward

Forward to

Fax

E

‑ mail

FTP

LDSS eSF

Forward to Shortcut

To

Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source.


Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Enable two

‑ sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.

Notes:


• This menu item appears only when a print duplexer is installed.

Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.


Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet.


Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.


Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.


Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.

Notes:

•

•

Fax is the factory default setting.

This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.

175

Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF).

Note: You can enter up to 16 characters.


Use

Block No Name Fax

Off

On

Banned Fax List

Use

Transmission Log

Print log

Do not print log

Print only for error

Receive Error Log

Print Never

Print on Error

Auto Print Logs

On

Off

Log Paper Source

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Logs Display

Remote Station Name

Dialed Number

Enable Job Log

On

Off

Enable Call Log

On

Off

Use

Speaker Mode

Always Off

On until Connected

Always On

Speaker Volume

High

Low

To

Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified.


Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.


To

Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.

Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.

Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.

Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.

Enable automatic printing of fax logs.

Notes:


• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.

Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.


176

Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax name returned.

Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.

Enable access to the Fax Job log.


Enable access to the Fax Call log.


To

Specify the mode of the speaker.

Notes:

• On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.

• Always On turns the speaker on.

• Always Off turns the speaker off.

Control the volume setting.

Note: High is the factory default setting.


Use

Ringer Volume

Off

On

Use

All Rings

Single Ring Only

Double Ring Only

Triple Ring Only

Single or Double Rings Only

Single or Triple Rings Only

Double or Triple Rings Only

E

‑

mail Settings menu

Use

E

‑ mail Server Setup

Subject

Message

File Name

To

Control the fax speaker ringer volume.


To

Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.

Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

To

Specify e

‑ mail server information.

Notes:

• You can enter up to 255 characters in the Subject field.

• You can enter up to 512 characters in the Message field.

• You can enter up to 53 characters in the File Name field.

Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.

Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.

E


Send me a copy

Never appears

On by default

Off by default

Always On

E


Max E

‑ mail size

0–65535 KB

E


Size Error Message

E


Limit destinations

Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.

Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.

Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.


Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e

‑ mail destinations only to that domain name.

Note: You can specify only one domain.

177


Use

E


Web Link Setup

Server

Login

Password

Path

File Name

Web Link

Format

PDF (.pdf)

Secure PDF

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

PDF Version

1.2–1.7

A–1a

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Color

Off

On

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Darkness

1–9

To

Define the e

‑ mail server path name, for example: /directory/path .

Notes:

178

• The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.

• You can enter up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web

Link.

• You can enter up to 53 characters for File Name.

Specify the format of the scanned file.

Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.

Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e

‑ mailing.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.





Specify whether copies are printed in color.

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.




Use

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5


Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long edge

Short edge

JPEG Quality

Best for content

5–90

Text Default

5–90

Text/Photo Default

5–90

To

Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.

Notes:



179


Notes:


• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Notes:

• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.

• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.

• This menu item applies to all scan functions.

Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.


Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.



Use

Photo Default

5–90

E

‑ mail images sent as

Attachment

Web Link

Use Multi

‑

Page Tiff

On

Off

180

To

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.


Specify how the images are sent.

Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple

‑ page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan

‑ to

‑ e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Notes:



Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.

Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.


Print log

Do not print log



Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

E

‑ mail Bit Depth

1 bit

8 bit


On

Off

Scan Preview

On

Off


On

Off


‑

4 to 4

Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.


Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1

‑ bit images.

Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Notes:



Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Notes:



Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.

Notes:


• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail

Destination screen.

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.



Use

Color Balance

Cyan

‑

Red

Magenta-Green

Yellow-Blue

Color Dropout

Color Dropout

None

Red

Green

Blue


0–255


0–255


0–255

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑

4 to 4

Adjust ADF Skew

Auto

Off

On


Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Temperature

‑

4 to 4

To

Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.

Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.

Notes:



181

Specify the contrast of the output.






Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.



Notes:


• This menu item appears only in select printer models.

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.


Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.


Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.



Use

Use cc:/bcc:

Off

On

FTP Settings menu

Use

Format

PDF (.pdf)

Secure PDF (.pdf)

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

PDF Version

1.2–1.7

A–1a

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Color

Off

On

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Darkness

1–9

To

Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields.


To

Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.






Specify whether or not copies are printed in color.


Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).




182


Use

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5


Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long edge

Short edge

JPEG Quality

Best for content

5–90

Text Default

5–90


5–90

To

Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.



Notes:



183


Notes:


• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape ).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape ).

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Notes:


• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.



Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.


Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.



Use

Photo Default

5–90

Use Multi

‑

Page TIFF

On

Off

184

To

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.



‑ page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan

‑ to

‑

FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Notes:



Specify whether the transmission log prints.

Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.


Print log

Do not print log



Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

FTP bit Depth

1 bit

8 bit

File Name

Custom Job Scanning

On

Off

Scan Preview

On

Off


On

Off


‑

4 to 4

Color Balance

Cyan

‑

Red

Magenta

‑

Green

Yellow

‑

Blue

Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.


Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1

‑ bit images.

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

Type a base file name.


Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.


Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Notes:



Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.




Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.


Use

Color Dropout

Color Dropout

None

Red

Green

Blue


0–255


0–255


0–255

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑

4 to 4

Adjust ADF Skew

Auto

Off

On


Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Temperature

‑

4 to 4

185

To

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much the dropout is increased or decreased.

Notes:



Specify the contrast of the output.









Notes:


• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.



Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.


Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.



Flash Drive menu

Scan Settings

Use

Format

PDF (.pdf)

Secure PDF

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

PDF Version

1.2–1.7

A

‑

1a

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Darkness

1–9

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

To

Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.

Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.

Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.





Note: “Black and White Laser” is the factory default setting.

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).




Specify the orientation of the scanned image.


186


Use

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Difficult Media Letter

Difficult Media A5

Difficult Media Legal

Difficult Media A4


Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long Edge

Short Edge

To


Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

JPEG Quality

Best for content

5–90

Text Default

5–90


5–90

Photo Default

5–90


Notes:


• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Notes:


• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.



Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.


Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.


Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.


187

File Name

Custom Job Scanning

On

Off

Scan Preview

On

Off


‑

4 to 4

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑

4 to 4


Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Temperature

‑

4 to 4


Use

Use Multi

‑

Page TIFF

On

Off

188

To


‑ page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.

Notes:



Type a base file name.

Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.

Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.


Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.




Specify the contrast of the scanned image.










Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.


Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.


Print Settings

Copies

1–999

Paper Source

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.


Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided

2 sided

Specify a default number of copies for each print job.


Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.

Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.

Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.

Staple

Off

On

Specify whether prints are stapled.

Notes:


• This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed.

Duplex Binding

Long Edge

Short Edge

Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.

Notes:

• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).


Specify that multiple

‑ page images be printed on one side of a paper.

Notes:

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑

Up

3

‑

Up

4

‑

Up

6

‑

Up

9

‑

Up

12

‑

Up

16

‑

Up

Paper Saver Ordering

Horizontal

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

•

•

Specify the positioning of multiple

‑ page images.

Notes:

•

Off is the factory default setting.

The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Horizontal is the factory default setting.

• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.


Paper Saver Orientation

Auto

Landscape

Portrait

Specify the orientation of a multiple

‑ page document.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.

Print a border on each page image.


Paper Saver Border

None

Solid


Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:


• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to

“(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.

• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .


Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.


Blank Pages

Do Not Print

Print

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings

Setup menu

Use

Printer Language

PCL Emulation

PS Emulation

To

Set the printer language.

Notes:

• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.

• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.


Use

Job Waiting

On

Off

Print Area

Normal

Whole Page

Download Target

RAM

Flash

Disk

Resource Save

On

Off

191

To

Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings.

Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.

Notes:


• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.

Set the logical and physical printable area.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non

‑ printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non

‑ printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.

This affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.

This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or

PostScript interpreter.

Set the storage location for downloads.

Notes:

• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the

RAM is temporary.

• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.

• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.

Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed.

Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.

• On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then

Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not deleted.


Use

Print All Order

Alphabetical

Oldest First

Newest First

Finishing menu

Use

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided

2 sided

Duplex Binding

Long Edge

Short Edge

Copies

1–999

Blank Pages

Do Not Print

Print

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

192

To

Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected.

Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

To

Specify whether two

‑ sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.

Notes:

• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.

• You can set two

‑ sided printing from the printer software.

For Windows users:

Click File > Print , and then click Properties , Preferences , Options , or Setup .

For Macintosh users:

Choose File > Print , and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop

‑ up menus.

Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed in relation to page orientation.

Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).


Specify the default number of copies for each print job.


Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.


Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Notes:

• “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.

• On stacks the print job in sequence.

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑

Up

3

‑

Up

4

‑

Up

6

‑

Up

9

‑

Up

12

‑

Up

16

‑

Up

Paper Saver Ordering

Horizontal

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Paper Saver Orientation

Auto

Landscape

Portrait

Paper Saver Border

None

Solid

Staple Job

Off

On


Use


Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

193

To

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.

• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if

Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.

• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.

Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

Print multiple

‑ page images on one side of a paper.

Notes:


• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Specify the positioning of multiple

‑ page images when using Paper Saver.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.

• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.

Specify the orientation of a multiple

‑ page document.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.

Print a border when using Paper Saver.


Specify whether printed output is stapled.

Notes:


• This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.


Use

Run Stapler Test

To

Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.

Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

Quality menu

Use

Print Resolution

300 dpi

600 dpi

1200 dpi

1200 Image Q

2400 Image Q

Pixel Boost

Off

Fonts

Horizontally

Vertically

Both directions

Toner Darkness

1–10

Enhance Fine Lines

On

Off

Gray Correction

Auto

Off

Brightness

‑

6 to 6

Contrast

0–5

To

Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.

Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.

Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.


Lighten or darken the printed output.

Notes:


• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.

Notes:


• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.

Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner by lightening the output.


Adjust the contrast of printed objects.


Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer hard disk is not read/write

‑ or write

‑ protected.


Use

Job Accounting Log

Off

On

Job Accounting Utilities

Accounting Log Frequency

Weekly

Monthly

Log Action at End of Frequency

None

E

‑ mail Current Log

E

‑ mail & Delete Current Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Disk Near Full Level

Off

1–99

Disk Near Full Action

None

E

‑ mail Current Log

E


E

‑ mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post Current Log


Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All Logs

Delete All But Current

Disk Full Action

None

E


E

‑ mail & Delete Oldest Log


Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All Logs

Delete All But Current

URL to Post Logs

E

‑ mail Address to Send Logs

To

Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.


Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.

Determine and set how often a log file is created.

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.


Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near

Full Action.


Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.

• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered.

Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).


Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.

Specify the e

‑ mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.


Use

Log File Prefix

196

To

Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix.

Utilities menu

Use

Remove Held Jobs

Confidential

Held

Not Restored

All

Format Flash

Yes

No

Delete Downloads on Disk

Delete Now

Do Not Delete

Activate Hex Trace

To

Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.

Notes:

• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.

Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.

• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.

Format the flash memory.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.

Notes:

• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.

• No cancels the format request.

• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer.

• The flash memory option card must not be read/write

‑ or write

‑ protected.

• This menu item appears only when a non

‑ defective flash memory card is installed.

Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs.

Notes:

• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.

• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch

‑ screen printer models. When selected in non

‑ touch

‑ screen printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion.

Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.

Notes:

• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.

• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.


Use

Coverage Estimator

Off

On

XPS menu

Use

Print Error Pages

Off

On

PDF menu

Use

Scale to Fit

Yes

No

Annotations

Do Not Print

Print

PostScript menu

Use

Print PS Error

On

Off

Lock PS Startup Mode

On

Off

Font Priority

Resident

Flash/Disk

197

To

Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.


To

Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.


To

Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Print annotations in a PDF.


To

Print a page containing the PostScript error.


Disable the SysStart file.


Establish the font search order.

Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting.

• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.

• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write

‑

, write

‑

, or password

‑ protected.

• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.


PCL Emul menu

Use

Font Source

Resident

Disk

Download

Flash

All

Font Name

Courier 10

Symbol Set

10U PC

‑

8

12U PC

‑

850

PCL Emulation Settings

Point Size

1.00–1008.00


Pitch

0.08–100


Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

198

To

Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.

Notes:

• “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.

• “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.

• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write

‑

, write

‑

, or password

‑ protected.

• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.

• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.

Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Notes:

• 10U PC

‑

8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC

‑

850 is the international factory default setting.

• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.

Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.

Notes:


• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 inch.

• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25

‑ point increments.

Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.

Notes:


• Pitch refers to the number of fixed

‑ space characters per inch (cpi).

• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01

‑ cpi increments.

• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed.

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Notes:

• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.

• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.


A4 Width

198 mm

203 mm


Auto CR after LF

On

Off


Auto LF after CR

On

Off

Tray Renumber

Assign MP Feeder

Off

None

0–199

Assign Tray [x]

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Paper

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Env

Off

None

0–199


Use


Lines per Page

1–255

199

To

Specify the number of lines that print on each page.

Notes:

• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.

• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the

Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.

Set the printer to print on A4

‑ size paper.

Notes:

• “198 mm” is the factory default setting.

• The 203

‑ mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty

10

‑ pitch characters.

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.


Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.


Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders.

Notes:

• “Off” is the factory default setting.

• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.

• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.


Use

Tray Renumber

View Factory Defaults

MPF Default = 8

T1 Default = 1

T1 Default = 4

T1 Default = 5

T1 Default = 20

T1 Default = 21

Env Default = 6

MPaper Default = 2

MEnv Default = 3

Tray Renumber

Restore Defaults

Yes

No

HTML menu

Use

Font Name

Albertus MT

Antique Olive

Apple Chancery

Arial MT

Avant Garde

Bodoni

Bookman

Chicago

Clarendon

Cooper Black

Copperplate

Coronet

Courier

Eurostile

Garamond

Geneva

Gill Sans

Goudy

Helvetica

Hoefler Text

Intl CG Times

Intl Courier

Intl Univers

To

Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.

Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

Joanna MT

Letter Gothic

Lubalin Graph

Marigold

MonaLisa Recut

Monaco

New CenturySbk

New York

Optima

Oxford

Palatino

StempelGaramond

Taffy

Times

TimesNewRoman

Univers

Zapf Chancery

NewSansMTCS

NewSansMTCT

New SansMTJA

NewSansMTKO

To

Set the default font for HTML documents.

Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.

200

Backgrounds

Do Not Print

Print

Image menu

Use

Auto Fit

On

Off

Invert

On

Off

Scaling

Anchor Top Left

Best Fit

Anchor Center

Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width


Use

Font Size

1–255 pt

Scale

1–400%

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Margin Size

8–255 mm

To

Set the default font size for HTML documents.

Notes:

• 12 pt is the factory default setting.

• Font size can be increased in 1

‑ point increments.

Scale the default font for HTML documents.

Notes:

• 100% is the factory default setting.

• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.


Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Notes:

• 19 mm is the factory default setting.

• Margin size can be increased in 1

‑ mm increments.

Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

201

To

Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Notes:


• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.

Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.

Notes:

• Best Fit is the factory default setting.

• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.


Use

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

To

Set the image orientation.


Help menu

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at http://support.lexmark.com

.

Menu item

Print All Guides

Copy Guide

E

‑ mail Guide

Fax Guide

FTP Guide

Print Defects Guide

Information Guide

Supplies Guide

Description

Prints all the guides

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

Provides information about sending e

‑ mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an

FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Provides help in locating additional information

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment 203

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter

• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment

• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco

‑

Mode” on page 204 .

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 71 .

Conserving supplies

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports two

‑ sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper.

Notes:

• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.

• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com

.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple

‑ page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by setting multiple page printing (N

‑

Up) for the print job.


Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.

• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 228 .

Saving energy

Using Eco

‑

Mode


Notes:



2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco

‑

Mode > select a setting

Use

Off

Energy

To

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco

‑

Mode. Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.

• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.

Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.

Plain Paper • Enable the automatic two

‑ sided (duplex) feature.

• Turn off print log features.

3 Click Submit .

Reducing printer noise

Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.


Notes:



2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting


Use

On

Off

To

Reduce printer noise.

Notes:

• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.

• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.

Use factory default settings.

Note: This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit .

Adjusting Sleep mode


> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.


Using Hibernate mode

Hibernate is an ultra

‑ low

‑ power operating mode.

Notes:

• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.

• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.

• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.


> Settings > General Settings

2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate , and then touch Submit .

Setting Hibernate Timeout

Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a reduced power state.




Notes:



2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts .

3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.

4 Click Submit .



> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout

2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.

3 Touch .

Using Schedule Power Modes

Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.



Notes:



2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes .

3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.

4 From the Time menu, select the time.

5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.

6 Click Add .

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.

Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.




Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.


2 Click Settings > General Settings .

3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

4 Click Submit .



> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

3 Touch .

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter

• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment

• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle .

2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.

3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.


When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle .

2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.

3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer 209

Securing the printer

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.

Types of memory

Volatile memory

Non-volatile memory

Hard disk memory

Description

Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:

EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

• The printer is being decommissioned.

• The printer hard disk is being replaced.

• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.

• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.

• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.

• The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

In high

‑ security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing —Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data

• Crushing —Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable

• Milling —Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.


Erasing non

‑

volatile memory

• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions —Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

• Fax data —Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

1 Turn off the printer.

2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings .

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer memory.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu .

The printer will perform a power

‑ on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Notes:

• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.




The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.

3 Touch Wipe Disk , and then touch one of the following:

• Wipe disk (fast) —This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.

• Wipe disk (secure) —This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22

‑

M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.


• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.




Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.



Notes:



2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption .

Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non

‑ defective printer hard disk is installed.

3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable .

Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

4 Click Submit .




The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable .

Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.

• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.


• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.




Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the

Lexmark security Web page .

You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com

, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.

2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide .

Maintaining the printer 213

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies, may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.

3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.

4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer.

5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Maintaining the printer

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the scanner cover.

214

3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

4

3

1 White underside of the scanner cover

2 Scanner glass

3 ADF glass

4 White underside of the ADF cover

4 Close the scanner cover.

1

2


Checking the status of parts and supplies

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies .

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.


Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.


2 Click Device Status > More Details .

Ordering supplies

To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com

or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter

‑ or A4

‑ size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering a toner cartridge

Notes:

• The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.

• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.

Part name

Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge

Part number

24B6035


Ordering an imaging unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge.

For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Part name

Imaging unit

Part number

24B6040

Ordering staple cartridges

Part name

Staple cartridges

Part number

35S8500

Ordering a maintenance kit

Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.

• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.

• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.

Maintenance kit

100

‑

V maintenance kit *

110

‑

V maintenance kit

220

‑

V maintenance kit

* This is available only in Japan.

Part number

40X9147

40X9137

40X9138

Ordering an ADF separator roller

Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.

For information on replacing the ADF separator roller, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

Part name

Separator roller

Part number

40X9108

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and other printer settings.


The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

• Direct sunlight

• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)

• High humidity above 80%

• Salty air

• Corrosive gases

• Heavy dust

Replacing supplies

Replacing the toner cartridge

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

2

1


2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

218

3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.

4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.

5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

6 Close the front door.


Replacing the imaging unit


2

1

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

219

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.


4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

220

5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.



Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.


7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.


Replacing the staple cartridge

1 Open the stapler door.


2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

1 2

222

3 Hold both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, pull, and then lift the empty staple case from the cartridge.

3

1 2

4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder.

5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge.

1

2


6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

7 Replace the spare staple case for future use.

8 Close the stapler door.

223

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer


CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.


• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.

• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options.

• Keep the printer in an upright position.

• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Managing the printer 225

Managing the printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —

Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

.

Checking the virtual display


Notes:

• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.


2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e

‑

mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e

‑ mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.


Notes:



2 Click Settings .

3 From the Other Settings menu, click E

‑ mail Alert Setup .

4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e

‑ mail addresses.

5 Click Submit .

Note: For information on setting up the e

‑ mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, network, and supplies.



Notes:



2 Click Reports , and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web

Server

You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their end

‑ of

‑ life by setting the selectable alerts.

Notes:

• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.

• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end

‑ of

‑ life supply condition. E

‑ mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.

• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions.


Notes:



2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications .

3 From the drop

‑ down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:

Notification

Off

E

‑ mail Only

Warning

Description

The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.

The printer generates an e

‑ mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page.

The printer displays the warning message and generates an e

‑ mail about the status of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.

Continuable Stop 1

Non Continuable Stop 1,2

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs to press a button to continue printing.

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to continue printing.

1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.

2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit .


Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 52 .

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All

Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non

‑ volatile memory” on page 210 .

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.


> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

Clearing jams 228

Clearing jams

By carefully selecting paper and specialty media and loading it properly, you should be able to avoid most jams. If jams occur, then follow the steps outlined in this chapter.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use any tool to remove a jam. Doing so could permanently damage the fuser.

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.

• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.

• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Clearing jams

• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

229

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes.

• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.

• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.

• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.

• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Clearing jams 230

Notes:

• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.

• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting does not guarantee that the page will print.

1

9

2

3

4

8

5

7 6

Jam access area

1 Automatic document feeder

(ADF)

Printer control panel message

[x]

‑ page jam, open ADF to clear jam. [28y.xx]

What to do

Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the jammed paper.

2

3

4

5

6

7

Standard bin

Front door

Multipurpose feeder

Tray 1

Tray [x]

Rear door

[x]

‑ page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]

[x]

‑ page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]

[x]

‑ page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]

[x]

‑ page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]

Remove the jammed paper.

Open the front door, then remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit, and then the jammed paper.

Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper.

Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: You may need to open the rear door to clear some 23y.xx paper jams.

[x]

‑ page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx] Pull the indicated tray out, and then remove the jammed paper.

[x]

‑ page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

Open the rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.

8 Finisher rear door [x]-page jam, remove all pages from the finisher’s output bin.

Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]

• Open the finisher rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.

• Open the narrow door, and then remove the jammed paper.

9 Finisher output bin [x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]

• Move the left paper guide to the left and the right paper guide to the right, and then remove the jammed paper from the finisher bin.

• Open the finisher rear door and the narrow door, and then remove any jammed pages.

Clearing jams

[x]

‑

page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2 Open the ADF cover.

231

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.

5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper guide.

6 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]

‑

page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]




Clearing jams

[x]

‑

page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

1 Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door.

2

1

2 Gently pull down the rear door.


232



Clearing jams

4 Close the front and rear door.

5 From the printer control panel, select Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]

‑

page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]



2

1

233

Clearing jams

2 Pull out the toner cartridge using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

234

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

4 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.



Clearing jams

5 Lift the green flap in front of the printer.



235

7 Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the imaging unit into the printer.

Clearing jams 236

8 Insert the toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the cartridge into the printer.


10 From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]

‑

page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]


Clearing jams

2 Locate the lever, and then pull it down to release the jam.

237



4 Insert the tray.


[x]

‑

page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]

1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.


Clearing jams 238

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

Note: Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper.


[x]

‑

page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]


Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

Clearing jams



3 Insert the tray.


239

Clearing jams

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]

Paper jam in the finisher bin

1 Empty the standard bin.

240

2 Move the paper guides to the sides.

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.


Clearing jams

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door

1 Open the finisher rear door.

241



Clearing jams

3 Open the finisher narrow door, and then remove any paper fragments inside the narrow door.

4 Close the narrow door.

242

Clearing jams

5 Close the finisher rear door.


Staple jam in the finisher

1 Open the staple access door.

243

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

1 2

Clearing jams

3 Lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.

4 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place.

5 Insert staple cartridge back into the finisher until it clicks into place.

244

Clearing jams

6 Close the staple access door.


245

Troubleshooting 246

Troubleshooting

Understanding the printer messages

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

List of printer and toner cartridge regions

3

4

5

9

1

2

Region number

0

Region

Global

United States, Canada

European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland

Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand

Latin America

Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe

Invalid region

Notes:

• The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.

• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide .


Troubleshooting 247

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper .

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.

• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]





Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]





Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]





Check tray [x] connection


• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

If the error occurs a second time, then:


2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

3 Remove the indicated tray.

4 Reattach the tray.

5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

6 Turn the printer back on.

Troubleshooting 248

If the error occurs again, then:



3 Remove the tray.

4 Contact customer support.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.

Close rear door

Close the rear door of the printer.

Close finisher rear door

Close the rear door of the finisher.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]


• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.

• Cancel current print job.

• Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]

Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:

• The printer firmware has been updated.

• The tray for the print job has been removed.

Troubleshooting 249

• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.

• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]


• Replace the defective flash memory card.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.

• Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.

• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device

From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.


• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.

• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax memory full


Troubleshooting 250

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.



• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:


• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.



• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Imaging unit low [84.xy]

You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]


Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]

You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the

User’s Guide .


Troubleshooting 251

Incompatible tray [x] [59]


• Remove the indicated tray.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the indicated tray.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]


• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.

• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.

• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.


Insufficient memory to collate job [37]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.


Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.


Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]


Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]



• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting 252

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]


• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]


• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.


Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]


• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.

• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.


Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]


• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.


Troubleshooting 253

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]


• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.


Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]






Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]


• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.




Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]






Maintenance kit low [80.xy]

You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

or contact customer support, and then report the message.

If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting 254

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]

For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com



Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com



Memory full [38]


• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.


Memory full, cannot print faxes

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after the printer is restarted.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.

2 Try one or more of the following:

• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.

• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

Network [x] software error [54]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.

• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.

Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Troubleshooting 255

Non

‑

Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]

Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit.

The printer has detected a non

‑

Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press and hold and # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.

If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.

Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit www.lexmark.com

.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.

• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Paper changes needed


• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for each page to continue printing.

• Touch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray.


Parallel port [x] disabled [56]



• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto

Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Troubleshooting 256

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com

or contact customer support.

Remove defective disk [61]

Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]

Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com

.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide .

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com

.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide .


.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

or contact your service representative, and then report the message.

Replace all originals if restarting job.


• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.

Troubleshooting 257

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]


• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.

For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide .

• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]


• Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.

For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide .

• If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the imaging unit.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s

Guide .

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com

.

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]

Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s

Guide .


.

Restore held jobs?


• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.

• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Troubleshooting 258

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]


• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.

• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.

Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]



The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.

• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.

• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.


Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Some held jobs were not restored

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.

Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Troubleshooting 259

Standard network software error [54]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.

• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com


Standard USB port disabled [56]



• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto

Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job

Do either of the following:

• Install the missing supply to complete the job.


Too many flash options installed [58]



3 Remove the extra flash memory.



Too many trays attached [58]



3 Remove the extra trays.



Troubleshooting 260

Unformatted flash detected [53]


• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.

• Format the flash memory.

Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported disk

Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]



3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.



USB port [x] disabled [56]


Notes:

• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.


Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Solving printer problems

• “Basic printer problems” on page 261

• “Option problems” on page 263

• “Paper feed problems” on page 266

Troubleshooting 261

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action

Step 1

Make sure the printer is turned on.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Turn on the printer.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2

Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or

Hibernate mode.

Go to step 3.

Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?

Step 3

Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 4.

Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?

Step 4

Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.

Does other electrical equipment work?

Unplug the other electrical equipment, and then turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment.

Step 5

Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports.

Go to step 6.

Go to step 5.

Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?

Step 6

Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.

Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.

Make sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the

USB symbol on the printer

• The appropriate

Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port

Go to step 7.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Step 7

Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.

Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?

Go to step 8.

Troubleshooting 262

Action Yes

Step 8

Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Go to step 9.

Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?

Step 9

Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material.

Go to step 10.

No

Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed?

Step 10

Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.

Go to step 11.

Turn off the printer, remove all packing materials, then reinstall the hardware options, and then turn on the printer.

Use correct printer driver settings.

Are the port settings correct?

Step 11

Check the installed printer driver.

Go to step 12.

Install the correct printer driver.

Is the correct printer driver installed?

Step 12

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

The problem is solved. Contact customer support .

Is the printer working?

Printer display is blank

Action

Step 1

Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Does Ready appear on the printer display?

Step 2


The problem is solved. Turn off the printer, and then contact customer support .

Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

Troubleshooting 263

Option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No

Step 1

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.


Does the internal option operate correctly?

Step 2

Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.

a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board.

c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Go to step 3.

Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?

Step 3

Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list.

Go to step 4.

Connect the internal option to the controller board.

Reinstall the internal option.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Step 4 a Check if the internal option is selected.

It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see

“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .

b Resend the print job.


Does the internal option operate correctly?

Troubleshooting 264

Tray problems

Action Yes No

Step 1 a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.

• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.

• If you are printing on custom

‑ size paper, then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.


b Check if the tray closes properly.


Is the tray working?

Step 2 a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.



Is the tray working?

Step 3

Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.

Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the

Installed Features list.

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the tray. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the tray.

Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?

Step 4

Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 46 .


Is the tray available in the printer driver?

Troubleshooting 265

Cannot detect memory card

Action Yes No

Make sure the memory card is installed.

a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a memory card” on page 29 .

Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer controller board.

b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the

Installed Options list.


Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Action

Step 1

Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.

a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal

Solutions Port” on page 32 .

b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the

Installed Features list.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Check if you have a supported ISP.

Note: An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer.

Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?

Step 2

Check the cable and the ISP connection.

a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP.

b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board.

Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color

‑ coded.


Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

Action

Step 1

Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.

a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see

“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 32 .

b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?

No

Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card.

Note: A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this printer.

Troubleshooting 266

Action Yes No

Step 2

Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.

Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card.


Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?

Paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes

Step 1 a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:



• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.

b Insert the tray properly.

If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint automatically.

Go to step 2.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 2 a Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.


Go to step 3.


Step 3 a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 228 .

b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.

Contact customer support .


No

The problem is solved.



Troubleshooting 267

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action Yes

Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.

a Remove any jammed paper.

b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.


Does the paper jam message remain?

No


Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action

Turn on Jam Recovery.


> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or

Auto .

c Touch Submit .

Do pages reprint after a jam?

Yes No


Solving print problems

Printing problems

Multiple

‑

language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1 a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.

For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe

Acrobat.

b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.


Do the files print?

Step 2 a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.

b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK .


Do the files print?

Troubleshooting 268

Error message about reading the flash drive appears

Action

Step 1

Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.

Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB port.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Insert the flash drive into the front USB port.

Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?

Step 2

Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.

Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.

Wait until the printer is ready, then view the held jobs list, and then print the documents.

Go to step 3.

Is the indicator light blinking green?

Step 3 a Check for an error message on the display.

b Clear the message.

Go to step 4.


Does the error message still appear?

Step 4

Check if the flash drive is supported.

For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see

“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 79 .

Go to step 5.


Step 5

Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.


Contact support .

customer



Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1 a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer.

Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print.



Do the jobs print?

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 2 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the printer display.



Do the jobs print?

Step 3

If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.

Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.


Do the jobs print?

Step 4 a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.


Do the jobs print?

Step 5 a Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.




Do the jobs print?

Step 6 a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more information, see “Installing the printer” on page 46 .

Note: The printer software is available at http://support.lexmark.com

.


Do the jobs print?


269

Troubleshooting 270

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

Action Yes

Step 1

Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your print job is listed.

Go to step 2.

Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?

No

Select one of the Print and Hold options, and then resend the print job. For more information, see

“Printing confidential and other held jobs” on page 81 .

Step 2

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

• Delete the print job, and then send it again.

• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.

If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.


For Windows users a Open the Print Properties folder.

b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents” check box.

c Enter a PIN number.


Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.

Does the job print?

Step 3

Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.

Does the job print?

The problem is solved. Add additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting

Print job takes longer than expected

Action

Step 1

Change the environmental settings of the printer.

a From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings b Select Eco

‑

Mode or Quiet Mode , and then select Off .

Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies, or both.

Yes No


Did the job print?

Step 2

Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job


Did the job print?

Step 3 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.



Did the job print?

Step 4 a Disable the Page Protect feature.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect >

Off b Resend the print job.


Did the job print?

Step 5 a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.



Did the job print?

Step 6

Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.

Did the job print?


271

Troubleshooting 272

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action

Step 1 a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.


Yes No


Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Step 2 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.




Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.




Step 4 a Check if the trays are not linked.




Incorrect characters print

Action

Step 1

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.

Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.

Yes

Deactivate Hex Trace mode.

No

Go to step 2.

Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?

Step 2 a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or

Network [x] , and then set SmartSwitch to On.




Do incorrect characters print?

Troubleshooting

Tray linking does not work

Notes:

• The trays can detect paper length.

• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper

Size/Type menu.

Action Yes No

Step 1 a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type.

• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray.




Do the trays link correctly?

Step 2 a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.


Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.


Do the trays link correctly?

Large jobs do not collate

Action

Step 1 a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to

(1,2,3) (1,2,3).


Yes No


Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 2 a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).

Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.




273

Troubleshooting 274

Action Yes No

Step 3

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.



Unexpected page breaks occur

Action

Increase the printing timeout.


> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit .

c Resend the print job.

Did the file print correctly?

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

Yes No

The problem is solved. Check the original file for manual page breaks.

Action Yes

Step 1 a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer.


Go to step 2.

> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts .

b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use. For more information, contact your system support person.


Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

No


Troubleshooting 275

Action Yes

Step 2 a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your system support person.



Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Printer is printing blank pages

No


Action Yes

Step 1 a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.

1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.


Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Step 2 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.


2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.




Go to step 3.


No



Troubleshooting 276

Action

Step 3

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.


Yes


Clipped pages or images

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded.


Go to step 2.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?

No


No


Do one or more of the following:

• Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.


Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from

Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.



Go to step 4.

Troubleshooting 277

Action

Step 4 a Reinstall the imaging unit.

1 Remove the toner cartridge.

2 Remove the imaging unit.


3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.


Yes



No


Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected

Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.

Action Yes

Step 1

From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to

Transparency.

Go to step 2.

No

Set the paper type to

Transparency.

Is the paper type setting correct?

Step 2

Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.


Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?

Step 3

Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and then resend the print job.


Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?

Shadow images appear on prints

Leading edge

A B C D

A B C D

Trailing edge

Troubleshooting 278

Action

Step 1

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?

Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.


Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Step 4


Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Go to step 4.


No

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings.



Gray background on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1

Check if Allow Background Removal is set to Off.

a From the General Settings menu, set Allow Background Removal to

On.


Yes No


Did the background disappear from the prints?

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 2

Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting.

a From the Quality Menu, select a lower value to reduce toner density.


• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness for all print jobs.




Step 3

Reinstall the toner cartridge.

a Remove the cartridge.

b Install the cartridge.




Step 4

Check if off-white background is selected.

a Depending on your operating system, set off-white background from

Print Properties or the Print dialog.




Incorrect margins on prints

279

A B C D

A B C D

A B C D

Action Yes No

Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.



Are the margins correct?

Troubleshooting 280

Action

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?

Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from

Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.


Yes No

Go to step 3.


• Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.


Are the margins correct?

Paper curl

Action Yes

Step 1

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.

Go to step 2.

Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?

Step 2


Go to step 3.

Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?



Go to step 4.

Is the paper still curled?

Step 4 a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.



Go to step 5.

No

Adjust the width and length guides.

Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.



Troubleshooting 281

Action




Yes



No


Print irregularities

Leading edge

)

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.


Go to step 2.

No


Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper size and type from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in the tray?



Go to step 4.


Step 4

Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?


From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the

Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 282

Action




Yes

Go to step 6.


Step 6



No


Contact customer support at http://support.lexmar

k.com

or your service representative.


Repeating defects appear on prints

Action

Step 1

Measure the distance between the defects.

Check for a distance between the defects that equals:

• 97 mm (3.82 in.)

• 47 mm (1.85 in.)

• 38 mm (1.5 in.)

Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?

Step 2


Do the repeating defects still appear?

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

1 Check if the distance between the defects equal to 80 mm (3.15 in.)

2 Take note of the distance, and then contact customer support at http://support.le

xmark.com


Contact customer support at http://support.lexma

rk.com



Troubleshooting

Print is too dark

283

Action Yes

Step 1 a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner darkness.



Go to step 2.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 2 a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.


Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

No



• Specify the paper type, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type, texture and weight specified in the tray settings.


Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.


Go to step 4.


Step 4

Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.


From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.

Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 284

Action




Yes

Go to step 6.


Step 6




Print is too light

No



Action Yes

Step 1 a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner darkness.

Go to step 2.



Is the print still too light?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

Step 3 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.


Go to step 4.


No


Change the paper type, texture, and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.


Troubleshooting 285

Action

Step 4

Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.





Yes

From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.

Go to step 6.

No

Go to step 5.









Go to step 7.


Step 7






Skewed print

)

ABCDE

ABCDE

Troubleshooting 286

Action Yes

Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.


Go to step 2.

Is the print still skewed?

Step 2 a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.


Is the print still skewed?


Printer is printing solid black pages

No



Action






Yes

Go to step 2.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Step 2



Is the printer printing solid black pages?

No



Troubleshooting 287

Transparency print quality is poor

Action

Step 1

From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?

Step 2 a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.


Is the print quality still poor?


Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

No

Set the paper type to

Transparency.


ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Action Yes

Step 1 a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from

Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.


Go to step 2.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 2


Go to step 3.

Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?




Go to step 4.


No


Change the paper type and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.


Troubleshooting 288

Action






Yes

Go to step 5.


Step 5




Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1 a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.


Go to step 2.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?

No



No



• Specify the paper texture, type, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture, type, and weight specified in the tray settings.

Troubleshooting 289

Action




Yes

Go to step 4.







Go to step 5.


Step 5



No




k.com



Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.


Yes

Go to step 2.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 2 a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.


Go to step 3.


No



Troubleshooting 290

Action







Yes

Go to step 4.


Step 4




Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge

No



Trailing edge

Action

Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.


Yes

Go to step 2.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 2 a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the

Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.


Go to step 3.


Step 3

Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.

a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.


Go to step 4.


No




Troubleshooting 291

Action







Yes

Go to step 5.


Step 5




Toner specks appear on prints

Action


Do toner specks appear on prints?

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

Yes


No



No


ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Action

Step 1

Reinstall the imaging unit.

a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.


Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Yes

Go to step 2.

No


Troubleshooting 292

Action

Step 2


Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Yes No


k.com



Toner rubs off

Leading edge

ABC

DEF

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type, texture, and weight.

Go to step 2.

Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in the tray?

Step 2

Resend the print job.


Does the toner still rub off?

No

Specify the paper type, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.


Uneven print density

Action


Is the print density uneven?

Yes


No


Troubleshooting 293

Solving copy problems

• “Copier does not respond” on page 293

• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 293

• “Poor copy quality” on page 294

• “Partial document or photo copies” on page 295

Copier does not respond

Action

Step 1

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Yes No

Clear the error or status message.

Go to step 2.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 3.

Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.


Step 3

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.


Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Scanner unit does not close

Action

Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer.

a Lift the scanner unit.

b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.

c Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close properly?

Yes No


Troubleshooting 294

Poor copy quality

Action

Step 1


Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2

Check the quality of the original document.

Yes No


Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher

‑ quality output.

Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?

Step 3

If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

Go to step 4.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4

Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco

‑

Mode settings.

b From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.

c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.

Go to step 5.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 5

Check the placement of the document or photo.

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Go to step 6.

See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 214 .

See “Print quality problems” on page 274 .

Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 6

Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher

‑ quality output.


Did the increased resolution produce a higher

‑ quality output?

Step 7

Check the copy settings.

From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.

Go to step 8.

Change the Content

Type and Content

Source settings to match the document being scanned.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?

Troubleshooting 295

Action Yes

Step 8

Check for patterns on print.

a From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower setting b On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.

Go to step 9.

Do patterns appear on prints?

Step 9

Check for missing or faded text on prints.


Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings:

• Improve sharpness —Increase the sharpness setting.

• Remove background —Reduce the current background removal setting.

• Increase contrast —Increase the current setting.

• Decrease shadow —Reduce the current setting.

Go to step 10.

Do prints have missing or faded text?

Step 10

Check for washed

‑ out or overexposed output.


Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging b Adjust the settings of the following:

• Background removal —Reduce the current setting.

• Shadow detail —Reduce the current background removal setting.

c Resend the copy job.


Do pages show washed

‑ out or overexposed prints?

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes

Step 1



Go to step 2.


No




No


Troubleshooting 296

Action Yes

Step 2

Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper

Size setting.

Go to step 3.

No

Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray, or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting.

Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

Step 3 a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.



Do copies print properly?

Solving fax problems

• “Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 296

• “Caller ID is not shown” on page 297

• “Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 297

• “Can send but not receive faxes” on page 299

• “Can receive but not send faxes” on page 300

• “Received fax has poor print quality” on page 301

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up

Notes:

• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.

• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e

‑ mail.

Action a From the home screen, navigate to:

Yes No


> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >

Submit b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c Select a language, and then touch .

d Select a country or region, and then touch Next .

e Select a time zone, and then touch Next .

f Select Fax and E

‑ mail , and then touch Next .

Are fax and e

‑ mail functions set up?

Troubleshooting 297

Caller ID is not shown

Action

Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.

Notes:

• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).

• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns.

• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Does the caller ID appear?

Yes No


Cannot send or receive a fax

Action

Step 1


Yes No


Go to step 2.

Is there an error or status message on the display?

Step 2


Go to step 3.


Step 3

Check the power.

Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the display.

Go to step 4.

Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?

Step 4

Check the printer connections.

If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure:

• Telephone

• Handset

• Answering machine

Are the cable connections secure?

Go to step 5.


Turn on the printer, and then wait until

Ready appears on the display.

Securely connect the cables.

Troubleshooting 298

Action Yes No

Step 5 a Check the telephone wall jack.

1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.

2 Listen for a dial tone.

3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack.

4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack.

5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

b Try sending or receiving a fax.


Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 6

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.

The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an

ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.

• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.

• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Go to step 7.

Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.

Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector?

Step 7

Check for a dial tone.

Go to step 8.

Did you hear a dial tone?

• Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly.

• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.

• If you are using the

On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone.

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 8

Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.



Step 9 a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.




Step 10 a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact your telephone company.

Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.




Step 11

Scan the original document one page at a time.

a Dial the fax number.

b Scan the document one page at a time.



Can send but not receive faxes

Action

Step 1

Check the tray or feeder.

If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

Can you receive faxes?

Yes No


299

Troubleshooting

Action

Step 2

Check the ring count delay settings.

a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:



b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup .

c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.

d Click Submit .

Yes No



Step 3

Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.



Can receive but not send faxes

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the printer is in Fax mode.

From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and then send the fax.

Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.

To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.


Can you send faxes?

Step 2

Load the original document properly.

Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.

Place these items on the scanner glass.


Can you send faxes?

300

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 3

Set up the shortcut number properly.

• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number that you want to dial.

• Dial the telephone number manually.


Can you send faxes?

Received fax has poor print quality

Action

Step 1

Ask the person who sent you the fax to: a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

c Resend the fax.

Yes No


Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Step 2

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.


Notes:



• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup .

c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600

• 14400

• 33600 d Click Submit , and then resend the fax.



301

Troubleshooting 302

Action Yes No

Step 3

Replace the toner cartridge.

When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge, and then resend the fax.



Solving scanner problems

• “The scanner does not respond” on page 302

• “Scan job was not successful” on page 303

• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 304

• “Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 304

• “Poor scanned image quality” on page 305

• “Partial document or photo scans” on page 306

• “Cannot scan from a computer” on page 306

The scanner does not respond

Action

Step 1

Check if the printer is turned on.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No



Step 2

Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Go to step 3.

Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?

Step 3


Go to step 4.


Step 4

Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.

Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.


Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 303

Action Yes

Step 5

Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.

Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?

Step 6

Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.

Are the other electrical equipment working?

Step 7


No

Go to step 6.

Unplug the other electrical equipment and turn on the printer.

If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.


Are the printer and scanner working?

Scan job was not successful

Action

Step 1

Check the cable connections.

Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Connect the cables properly.

Are the cables securely connected?

Step 2

Check if the file name is already in use.

Is the file name already in use?

Step 3

Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user.

Change the file name.

Close the file you are scanning.

Is the file you want to scan open in another application or being used by another user?

Step 4

Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.

Go to step 5.

Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings?

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Select the stamp or

Append time

Overwrite existing file check box in the destination configuration settings.

Troubleshooting 304

Action Yes No

Step 5

From the Flash Drive menu, reduce the scan resolution settings, and then resend the scan job.


Does the job scan?

Step 6

Check the scan settings.

From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.

The problem is solved. Change the Content

Type and Content



Scanner unit does not close

Action

Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.

a Lift the scanner unit.

b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.

c Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Yes No


Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action

Step 1

Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.

Close all applications that are not being used.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Step 2

Select a lower scan resolution.


Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

No



Troubleshooting 305

Poor scanned image quality

Action

Step 1

Check if an error message appears on the display.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 2

Check the quality of the original document.

Yes

Clear the error message.

Go to step 3.

Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?

Step 3

Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint

‑ free cloth dampened with water.

Go to step 4.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4



Go to step 5.


Step 5

Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco

‑

Mode settings.

• From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.

• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.

Go to step 6.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 6

Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher

‑ quality output.

Problem solved.

Did the increased resolution produce a higher

‑ quality output?

Step 7

Check the scan settings.

From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.



No

Go to step 2.

Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher

‑ quality output.

See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 214 .


See “Print quality problems” on page 274 .

Go to step 7.

Change the Content

Type and Content


Troubleshooting 306

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes





Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes

Step 1

Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer display before scanning a job.

Go to step 3.

Does Ready appear before scanning the job?

Step 2


Clear the error message.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 3

Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to make sure they are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.


Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server secure?

No

Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

No

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Tighten the cable connections.

Troubleshooting 307

Solving home screen application problems

An application error has occurred

Action

Step 1

Check the system log for relevant details.


If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer home screen.

• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.


b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log .

c From the Filter menu, select an application status.

d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click

Submit .

Does an error message appear in the log?

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Resolve the error.

Is the application working now?

Yes No



Embedded Web Server does not open

Action Yes

Step 1

Make sure the printer IP address is correct.

View the printer IP address:

• From the printer home screen



Go to step 2.


Is the printer IP address correct?

Step 2

Check if the printer is turned on.


Go to step 3.

No

Type the correct printer IP address in the address field of your

Web browser.

Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type

“ https ://” instead of

“ http ://” before the printer IP address to access the Embedded

Web Server.


Troubleshooting 308

Action

Step 3

Check if the network connection is working.

Yes

Go to step 4.

Is the network connection working?

Step 4

Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Go to step 5.

Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?

Step 5

Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.

Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain

Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.

Go to step 6.

No

Contact your system support person.

Tighten the cable connection.

Contact your system support person.

Are the Web proxy servers disabled?

Step 6

Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address in the address field.


Did the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com

, and then select one of the following:

Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you solve common problems.

E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.

Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit http://support.lexmark.com

.

Notices 309

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark XM3150

Machine type:

7016

Model(s):

679

Edition notice

March 2014

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com

.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com

.

© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.

2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.

12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.

Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices 310

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for

USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

(859) 232–3000

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Notices

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing 55

Scanning

Copying

Ready

45

56

N/A

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com

for current values.

Temperature information

Ambient operating temperature

Shipping temperature

Storage temperature and relative humidity

15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)

1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)

8 to 80% RH

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

311

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European

Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com

for your local sales office phone number.

India E-Waste notice

This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1

％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Notices

Static sensitivity notice

312

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I

(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

Notices 313

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.

Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zra č enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.

NEBEZPE Č Í - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze za ř ízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové zá ř ení. Nevystavujte se p ů sobení laserového paprsku.

FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.

GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.

DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.

VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.

GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.

ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης . Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.

VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat el ő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.

PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.

FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.

NIEBEZPIECZE Ń STWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Nale ż y unika ć na ś wietlenia promieniem lasera.

ОПАСНО ! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки . Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей .

Pozor – Nebezpe č enstvo nevidite ľ ného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lú č om.

PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.

FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.

危险

- 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。

危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。

危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode

Printing

Copy

Scan

Description Power consumption

(Watts)

The product is generating hard

‑ copy output from electronic inputs.

640

The product is generating hard

‑ copy output from hard

‑ copy original documents.

660

The product is scanning hard

‑ copy documents.

40

Ready The product is waiting for a print job.

Sleep Mode The product is in a high

‑ level energy

‑ saving mode.

Hibernate The product is in a low

‑ level energy

‑ saving mode.

Off

20

7

0.5

The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com

for current values.

Notices 314

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode . The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout .

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.

Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra

‑ low power operating mode called Hibernate mode . When operating in Hibernate

Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

• Using the Hibernate Timeout

• Using the Schedule Power modes

• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Notices

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.

日本の

VCCI

規定

製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。

315

この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この

装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。

取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。

VCCI-B

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,

2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950

‑

1.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is

Notices 316 provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.

The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.

at www.lexmark.com

or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,

Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's

Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Notices 317

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s

Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés

à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.

Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre, entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.

Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Notices 318

Japanese telecom notice

The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.

Lexmark International, Inc.

LEX-M03-002

A11-0160001JP

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer

80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die

Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,

2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy

‑ related products.

Notices

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

319



Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.


‑

1.

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

Wireless

‑ equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type Model Number LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notice to users in Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial, mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.

(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).

Industry Canada (Canada)

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Notices 320

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding.

Industrie Canada (Canada)

Selon la règlementation d'Industrie Canada, l'émetteur radio ne fonctionner qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou inférieur) ont été approuvés par Industrie Canada. Pour réduire les interférences radio potentielles auprès d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis de telle sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure à ce qui est nécessaire pour assurer la réussite de la communication.

Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.

Pour éviter toute interférence radio au service sous licence, cet appareil est destiné à être utilisé à l'intérieur et à l'écart des fenêtres afin d'assurer une protection maximale.

Taiwan NCC RF notice statement

NCC 型式認證設備注意事項

台灣低功率射頻電機設備之使用注意事項

依據低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法

第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功

率或變更原設計之特性及功能。

第十四條低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並

改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合

法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。

在 5.25 ~ 5.35 秭赫頻帶內操作之無線資訊傳輸設備，限於室內使用。

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,

1999/5/EC, 2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.





Notices 321


‑

1.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, 2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.


AT

EL

LI

RO

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.




This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

BE

ES

LT

SE

BG

FI

LU

SI

CH

FR

LV

SK

CY

HR

MT

TR

CZ

HU

NL

UK

DE

IE

NO

DK

IS

PL

EE

IT

PT

Č esky

Dansk

Spole č nost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shod ě se základními požadavky a dalšími p ř íslušnými ustanoveními sm ě rnice 1999/5/ES.

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch

Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ

ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ

ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ ΕΚ .

English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Eesti

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Notices 322

Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklar ē , ka šis izstr ā d ā jums atbilst Direkt ī vas 1999/5/EK b ū tiskaj ā m pras ī b ā m un citiem ar to saist ī tajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvi ų Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas

1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti Bil-pre ż enti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi malessenzjali u ma dispo ż izzjonijiet o ħ rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

ħ ti ġ ijiet

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Norsk

Polski

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og

øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. o ś wiadcza, ż e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ł ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.

Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo č ili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from

Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

Notices 323

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport

Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.

You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the

Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact

Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

Notices 324

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications

—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR

REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH

RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT

MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,

AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR

ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its

Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property

Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport

Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois

Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.

Notices 325


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security

(TLS) implemented in the product or service.

The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the

Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service.


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital

Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service.


Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.

Index 326

Index

Numerics

250

‑ sheet tray installing 43

550

‑ sheet tray installing 43

Symbols

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin.

[45y.xx] 240

[x]

‑ page jam, clear manual feeder.

[25y.xx] 237

[x]

‑ page jam, clear standard bin.

[20y.xx] 231

[x]

‑ page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 231

[x]

‑ page jam, open front door.

[20y.xx] 233

[x]

‑ page jam, open rear door.

[20y.xx] 232

[x]

‑ page jam, open tray [x].

[24y.xx] 238

[x]

‑ page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx] 236

A

accessing the Embedded Web

Server 20

Active NIC menu 144 adapter plug 111 adding hardware options print driver 46

ADF copying using 84

ADF separator roller ordering 216 adjusting brightness

Embedded Web Server 206 printer control panel 206 adjusting copy quality 89 adjusting display brightness 206 adjusting Sleep mode 205 adjusting toner darkness 77 administrator settings

Embedded Web Server 225 advanced options fax 123

FTP 94

FTP options 131 advanced options, touch

‑ screen e

‑ mail 101 answering machine setting up 104

AppleTalk menu 149 applications home screen 22 understanding 21 attaching cables 46 available internal options 27 avoiding jams 72 avoiding paper jams 228

B

blocking junk faxes 120 buttons, printer control panel 15 buttons, touch screen using 18

C

cables

Ethernet 46

USB 46 canceling a print job from a computer 82 from the printer control panel 82 canceling an e-mail 99 cannot open Embedded Web

Server 307

Card Copy setting up 23 card stock loading, multipurpose feeder 58 tips 69

Cartridge low [88.xy] 246

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 246

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 246

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch

[41.xy] 246

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 247

Check tray [x] connection 247 checking an unresponsive printer 261 checking status of parts and supplies 215 checking the status of parts and supplies 215 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 225 cleaning exterior of the printer 213 scanner glass 214 cleaning the printer 213

Close finisher rear door 248

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 248

Close front door 248

Close rear door 248 collate copy options 94 collating copies 89 color quality troubleshooting prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 277

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 248 confidential data information on securing 212 confidential jobs modifying print settings 81 confidential print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81

Confidential Print menu 154

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57] 248 configuration information wireless network 48

Configure MP menu 136 configuring supply notifications, imaging unit 226

Index 327 supply notifications, maintenance kit 226 supply notifications, toner cartridge 226 configuring e

‑ mail settings 95 configuring port settings 51 configuring supply notifications 226 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 115 connecting to a wireless network using PIN (Personal Identification

Number) method 50 using Push Button Configuration method 50 using the Embedded Web

Server 51 using wireless setup wizard 49 conservation settings brightness, adjusting 206 conserving supplies 203

Eco

‑

Mode 204

Hibernate mode 205

Hibernate Timeout 205

Quiet Mode 204

Schedule Power Modes 206

Sleep Mode 205 conserving supplies 203 contacting customer support 308 content e

‑ mail settings 100 content source e

‑ mail settings 100 fax options 122 content type e

‑ mail settings 100 fax options 122 control panel, printer 15 indicator light 15

Sleep button light 15 controller board accessing 28 copies copy options 94 copy job, canceling using the ADF 92 using the scanner glass 92 copy options collate 94 copies 94 darkness 93 save as shortcut 94 sides (duplex) 93 copy quality adjusting 89 copy screen content source 94 content type 94 options 93

Copy Settings menu 166 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 293 partial document or photo copies 295 poor copy quality 294 poor scanned image quality 305 scanner unit does not close 293, 304 copying adding an overlay message 92 adjusting quality 89 canceling a copy job 92, 93 collating copies 89 custom job 91 different paper sizes 87 enlarging 88 inserting a header or footer 92 multiple pages on one sheet 90 on both sides of the paper

(duplexing) 88 on letterhead 86 on transparencies 85 photos 85 placing separator sheets between copies 90 quick copy 84 reducing 88 selecting a tray 87 to a different size 86 using the ADF 84 using the scanner glass 85 copying different paper sizes 87 copying multiple pages on one sheet 90 copying on both sides of the paper

(duplexing) 88 copying on transparencies 85 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web

Server 118 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web

Server 125 creating custom name paper type 64 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 129 custom name configuring 65

Custom Names menu 141 custom paper type name assigning 65

Custom Scan Sizes menu 142

Custom Type [x] changing paper type 65 creating custom name 64

Custom Types menu 141 customer support contacting 308

D

darkness copy options 93 e

‑ mail options 100 fax options 123 scan options 130 date and time, fax setting 116 daylight saving time, setting 116

Default Source menu 133

Defective flash detected [51] 249 delayed send fax options 123 different paper sizes, copying 87

Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) fax setup 108 digital telephone service fax setup 110 directory list printing 82

Disk full 62 249

Disk must be formatted for use in this device 249 disk wiping 210 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 262 display, printer control panel 15 adjusting brightness 206 disposing of printer hard disk 209 distinctive ring service, fax connecting to 115 documents, printing from Macintosh 77 from Windows 77

DSL filter 108 duplexing 88

Index

E

Eco

‑

Mode setting 204

Edit Security Setups menu 152

Embedded Web Server accessing 13, 20 administrator settings 225 checking the status of parts 215 checking the status of supplies 215 creating a fax destination shortcut 118 creating an FTP shortcut 125 creating e

‑ mail shortcuts 96 functions 13 initial fax setup 103 modifying confidential print settings 81 networking settings 225 problem accessing 307 scanning to a computer using 127 setting up e

‑ mail alerts 225 using 13

Embedded Web Server — Security:

Administrator's Guide where to find 225

Embedded Web Server — Security:

Administrator’s Guide where to find 212 emission notices 310, 314, 315, 319, 320 encrypting the printer hard disk 211 enlarging a copy 88 envelopes loading, multipurpose feeder 58 tips on using 67 environmental settings conserving supplies 203 display brightness, adjusting 206

Eco

‑

Mode 204

Hibernate mode 205


Quiet Mode 204


Sleep Mode 205

Erase Temporary Data Files menu 155 erasing hard disk memory 210 erasing non

‑ volatile memory 210 erasing volatile memory 209

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB. 249

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. 249

Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 48

Ethernet port 46

Ethernet setup preparing for an 48 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web

Server 26 exterior of the printer cleaning 213 e

‑ mail canceling 99 e

‑ mail alerts low supply levels 225 paper jam 225 setting up 225 e

‑ mail function setting up 95 e

‑ mail options darkness 100 message 99 original size 99 page setup 101 recipient(s) 99 resolution 100 send as 100 subject 99 e

‑ mail screen advanced options 101 options 99, 101

E

‑ mail Settings menu 177 e

‑ mail shortcuts, creating using the Embedded Web

Server 96 e

‑ mail, sending using a shortcut number 97 using the address book 98 e

‑ mailing adding message line 98 adding subject line 98 changing output file type 98 configuring e

‑ mail settings 95 creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 96 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 96 setting up e

‑ mail function 95

328 using a shortcut number 97 using the address book 98 using the printer control panel 97

F

factory defaults restoring 227 fax sending 117 fax and e

‑ mail functions setting up 296 fax and e

‑ mail functions are not set up 296 fax log viewing 120

Fax memory full 249

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu 169 fax name, setting 115 fax number, setting 115 fax options content source 122 content type 122 darkness 123 delayed send 123 page setup 123 resolution 123 scan preview 123

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. 250 fax ports 46 fax screen advanced options 123

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.

Contact system administrator. 250 fax setup country

‑ or region

‑ specific 111 digital telephone service 110

DSL connection 108 standard telephone line connection 104

VoIP 109

Fax Station Name not set up.

Contact system administrator. 250

Fax Station Number not set up.

Contact system administrator. 250 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 297 can receive but not send faxes 300 can send but not receive faxes 299

Index 329 cannot send or receive a fax 297 received fax has poor print quality 301 faxing blocking junk faxes 120 canceling a fax job 121 changing resolution 119 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 116 creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 118 creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 119 distinctive ring service 115 fax setup 103 forwarding faxes 122 holding faxes 121 making a fax lighter or darker 120 sending a fax at a scheduled time 118 sending using the printer control panel 116 setting the date and time 116 setting the fax number 115 setting the outgoing fax name 115 viewing a fax log 120

FCC notices 310, 315, 319 file name scan options 129 finding more information about the printer 9 finding printer IP address 20 finisher finishing features 75 supported paper sizes 75 finisher features 75

Finishing menu 192 firmware card 27 flash drive printing from 78

Flash Drive menu 186 flash drives supported file types 79 font sample list printing 82

Forms and Favorites setting up 22 forwarding faxes 122

FTP

FTP options 129

FTP address creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 125

FTP address, scanning to using a shortcut number 126 using the printer control panel 126

FTP options advanced options 131

FTP 129

FTP screen advanced options 94

FTP Settings menu 182

G

General Settings menu 157 green settings

Eco

‑

Mode 204

Hibernate mode 205


Quiet Mode 204


H

hardware options, adding print driver 46 held jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81

Help menu 202

Hibernate mode using 205

Hibernate Timeout setting 205 hiding icons on the home screen 21 holding faxes 121 home screen customizing 21 hiding icons 21 showing icons 21 home screen applications configuring 22 finding information 22 home screen buttons and icons description 16

HTML menu 200

I

icons on the home screen hiding 21 showing 21

Image menu 201 imaging unit ordering 216 replacing 219

Imaging unit low [84.xy] 250

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 250

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy] 250 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web

Server 26 in finisher rear door paper jams, clearing 240

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 251

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34] 251 initial fax setup 103 using the Embedded Web

Server 103 inserting a header or footer 92 installing an Internal Solutions

Port 32 installing an optional card 31 installing options order of installation 43 installing printer 46 installing printer hard disk 39 installing the 250

‑ sheet tray 43 installing the 550

‑ sheet tray 43

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation

[37] 251

Insufficient memory to collate job

[37] 251

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 252

Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted [37] 251

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37] 251 internal options 27

Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 51 installing 32 troubleshooting 265

IP address of computer finding 20

IP address, printer finding 20

IPv6 menu 147

Index 330

J

jams accessing 229 avoiding 228 understanding messages 229 jams, clearing finisher bin 240 in automatic document feeder top cover 231 in duplex area 236 in front door 233 in manual feeder 237 in rear door 232 in standard bin 231 in staple access door 240 in tray [x] 238

Job Accounting menu 194

L

labels, paper tips 68 letterhead copying on 86 loading, multipurpose feeder 58 tips on using 67 light, indicator 15 line filter 108 linking trays 64, 65

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 252

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation] 253

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation] 253

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation] 253

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 253 loading multipurpose feeder 58 trays 53 loading the optional tray 53 loading the standard tray 53

M

maintenance kit ordering 216

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 253

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 254

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 254 making copies using paper from selected tray 87 memory types installed on printer 209 memory card 27 installing 29 troubleshooting 265

Memory full [38] 254

Memory full, cannot print faxes 254

Memory full, cannot send faxes 254 menu settings page printing 52 menus

Active NIC 144

AppleTalk 149

Confidential Print 154

Configure MP 136

Copy Settings 166

Custom Names 141

Custom Scan Sizes 142

Custom Types 141

Default Source 133

Edit Security Setups 152

Erase Temporary Data Files 155

E

‑ mail Settings 177

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 169

Finishing 192

Flash Drive 186

FTP Settings 182

General Settings 157

Help 202

HTML 200

Image 201

IPv6 147

Job Accounting 194 list of 132

Miscellaneous Security

Settings 153

Network [x] 144

Network Card 146

Network Reports 145

Paper Loading 140

Paper Size/Type 133

Paper Texture 137

Paper Weight 138

PCL Emul 198

PDF 197

PostScript 197

Quality 194

Reports 143

Security Audit Log 155

Set Date/Time 156

Settings 190

SMTP Setup menu 151

Standard Network 144

Standard USB 149

Substitute Size 137

TCP/IP 146

Universal Setup 142

Utilities 196

Wireless 148

XPS 197 message e

‑ mail options 99

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu 153 mobile device printing from 79 moving the printer 10, 223, 224

Multi Send adding a profile 24 setting up 24 multipurpose feeder loading 58

MyShortcut about 23

N

Network [x] menu 144

Network [x] software error

[54] 254

Network Card menu 146

Network Reports menu 145 network settings

Embedded Web Server 225 network setup page printing 52

Networking Guide where to find 225

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled. 254 noise emission levels 310

Index

Non

‑

Lexmark [supply type], see

User’s Guide [33.xy] 255 non

‑ volatile memory 209 erasing 210

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52] 255 notices 310, 311, 312, 313, 314,

315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321 number of remaining pages estimate 216

O

optional card installing 31 optional tray loading 53 options

250

‑ sheet tray, installing 43

550

‑ sheet tray, installing 43 firmware cards 27

Internal Solutions Port, installing 32 memory card 29 memory cards 27 printer hard disk, installing 39 printer hard disk, removing 42 options, copy screen copy from 93 scale 93 options, touch

‑ screen copy 93 e

‑ mail 99, 101 ordering imaging unit 216 maintenance kit 216 staple cartridges 216 ordering supplies toner cartridge 215 original size e

‑ mail options 99 scan options 129 output file type changing 98

P

page setup e

‑ mail options 101 fax options 123 scan options 131 paper characteristics 69

331 different sizes, copying 87 letterhead 71 loading, multipurpose feeder 58 preprinted forms 71 recycled 71, 203 saving 90 selecting 70 storing 72 unacceptable 70

Universal size setting 53

Paper changes needed 255 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 267 paper jams avoiding 228 paper jams, clearing finisher bin 240 in automatic document feeder top cover 231 in duplex area 236 in finisher rear door 240 in front door 233 in manual feeder 237 in rear door 232 in standard bin 231 in staple access door 240 in tray [x] 238 paper labels loading, multipurpose feeder 58

Paper Loading menu 140 paper size setting 53

Paper Size/Type menu 133 paper sizes supported 72 paper stop, using 63

Paper Texture menu 137 paper type setting 53 paper types supported by printer 74 where to load 74

Paper Weight menu 138 paper weights supported by printer 74

Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 255 parts checking status 215 checking, from printer control panel 215 checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 215 using genuine Lexmark 215

PCL Emul menu 198

PDF menu 197

Personal Identification Number method using 50 phone splitter 109 photos copying 85 placing separator sheets between copies 90 port settings configuring 51

PostScript menu 197 preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network 48 print driver hardware options, adding 46 print irregularities 281 print job canceling, from computer 82 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 214 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 275 characters have jagged edges 274 clipped pages or images 276 gray background on prints 278 horizontal voids appear on prints 289 print irregularities 281 print is too dark 283 print is too light 284 printer is printing solid black pages 286 repeating print defects appear on prints 282 shadow images appear on prints 277 skewed print 285 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 287 streaked vertical lines 288 toner fog or background shading 291 toner rubs off 292 toner specks appear on prints 291 transparency print quality is poor 287 uneven print density 292

Index 332 white streaks 290 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 268 held jobs do not print 270 incorrect characters print 272 incorrect margins on prints 279 jammed pages are not reprinted 267 job prints from wrong tray 272 job prints on wrong paper 272 jobs do not print 268

Large jobs do not collate 273 multiple

‑ language PDF files do not print 267 paper curl 280 paper frequently jams 266 print job takes longer than expected 271 tray linking does not work 273 unexpected page breaks occur 274 printer 46 basic model 11 finishing features 75 fully configured 11 minimum clearances 10 moving 10, 223, 224 selecting a location 10 shipping 224 printer configurations 11 printer control panel 15 factory defaults, restoring 227 indicator light 15

Sleep button light 15 printer control panel, virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 225

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete. 256 printer hard disk disposing of 209 encrypting 211 installing 39 removing 42 wiping 210 printer hard disk encryption 211 printer hard disk memory erasing 210 printer information where to find 9 printer IP address finding 20 printer is printing blank pages 275 printer messages

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx] 240

[x]

‑ page jam, clear manual feeder.

[25y.xx] 237

[x]

‑ page jam, clear standard bin.

[20y.xx] 231

[x]

‑ page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 231

[x]

‑ page jam, open front door.

[20y.xx] 233

[x]

‑ page jam, open rear door.

[20y.xx] 232

[x]

‑ page jam, open tray [x].

[24y.xx] 238

[x]

‑ page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx] 236

Cartridge low [88.xy] 246

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 246

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy] 246

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch

[41.xy] 246

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load

[orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation] 247

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 247

Check tray [x] connection 247

Close finisher rear door 248

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 248

Close front door 248

Close rear door 248

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39] 248

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57] 248

Defective flash detected [51] 249

Disk full 62 249

Disk must be formatted for use in this device 249

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space. 249

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB. 249

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. 249

Fax memory full 249

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. 250

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.


Fax Station Name not set up.


Fax Station Number not set up.


Imaging unit low [84.xy] 250

Imaging unit nearly low

[84.xy] 250

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[84.xy] 250

Incompatible tray [x] [59] 251

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34] 251

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation

[37] 251

Insufficient memory to collate job

[37] 251

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 252

Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted [37] 251

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored

[37] 251

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [custom type name [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation] 252

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 252

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation] 253

Index 333

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation] 253

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation] 253

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation] 253

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 253

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 254

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 254

Memory full [38] 254

Memory full, cannot print faxes 254

Memory full, cannot send faxes 254

Network [x] software error

[54] 254

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled. 254

Non

‑

Lexmark [supply type], see

User’s Guide [33.xy] 255

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52] 255

Paper changes needed 255

Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 255

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete. 256

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy] 257

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy] 257

Remove defective disk [61] 256

Remove paper from standard output bin 256

Replace all originals if restarting job. 256

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy] 256

Replace defective imaging unit

[31.xy] 256

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy] 256

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 256

Replace unsupported cartridge

[32.xy] 257

Replace unsupported imaging unit

[32.xy] 257

Restore held jobs? 257

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 258

Scanner disabled by admin

[840.01] 258

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.

[840.02] 258

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 258

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 258

Serial port [x] disabled [56] 258

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator. 258

Some held jobs were not restored 258

Standard network software error

[54] 259

Standard USB port disabled

[56] 259

Supply needed to complete job 259

Too many flash options installed

[58] 259

Too many trays attached [58] 259

Unformatted flash detected

[53] 260

Unsupported disk 260

Unsupported option in slot [x]

[55] 260

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 249

USB port [x] disabled [56] 260

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator. 260 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 263

Internal Solutions Port 265 memory card 265 tray problems 264

USB/parallel interface card 265 printer problems, solving basic 261 printer security information on 212 printing canceling, from the printer control panel 82 directory list 82 font sample list 82 forms 77 from a mobile device 79 from flash drive 78 from Macintosh 77 from Windows 77 menu settings page 52 network setup page 52 printing a directory list 82 printing a document 77 printing a font sample list 82 printing a menu settings page 52 printing a network setup page 52 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 81 from Windows 81 printing forms 77 printing from a flash drive 78 printing from a mobile device 79 publications where to find 9

Push Button Configuration method using 50

Q

Quality menu 194

Quiet Mode 204

R

recipient(s) e

‑ mail options 99 recycled paper using 71, 203 recycling

Lexmark packaging 207

Lexmark products 207 toner cartridges 208 reducing a copy 88 reducing noise 204

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy] 257

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy] 257

Remote Operator Panel setting up 25

Remove defective disk [61] 256

Remove paper from standard output bin 256 removing printer hard disk 42

Index 334 repeat print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 repeating print defects appear on prints 282

Replace all originals if restarting job. 256

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy] 256

Replace defective imaging unit

[31.xy] 256

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy] 256

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 256

Replace unsupported cartridge

[32.xy] 257

Replace unsupported imaging unit

[32.xy] 257 replacing imaging unit 219 toner cartridge 217 replacing supplies staple cartridge 221 replacing the staple cartridge 221 reports viewing 225

Reports menu 143 reserve print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 resolution e

‑ mail options 100 fax options 123 scan options 130 resolution, fax changing 119

Restore held jobs? 257 restoring factory default settings 227

RJ

‑

11 adapter 111

S

safety information 7, 8 save as shortcut copy options 94 scan options 129 saving paper 90 scan options darkness 130 file name 129 original size 129 page setup 131 resolution 130 save as shortcut 129 scan preview 131 send as 130 scan preview fax options 123 scan options 131 scan screen content source 130 content type 130

Scan to Computer setting up 128

Scan to Network setting up 24 using 125 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 306 partial document or photo scans 306 scan job was not successful 303 scanner unit does not close 293, 304 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 304

ScanBack Utility using 129 scanner automatic document feeder

(ADF) 14 functions 14 scanner glass 14

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 258

Scanner disabled by admin

[840.01] 258

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.

[840.02] 258 scanner glass cleaning 214 copying using 85

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx] 258

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 258 scanning from a flash drive 128 quick copy 84 to a computer using the

Embedded Web Server 127 to an FTP address 126 scanning to a computer 128 using the Embedded Web

Server 127 scanning to a flash drive 128 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 125 using a shortcut number 126 using the address book 126 using the printer control panel 126 scanning to network destinations 125

Schedule Power Modes using 206 security modifying confidential print settings 81

Security Audit Log menu 155 security slot 46 security Web page where to find 212 selecting a location for the printer 10 selecting paper 70 send as e

‑ mail options 100 scan options 130 sending a fax using the computer 117 sending a fax using the printer control panel 116 sending an e

‑ mail using the printer control panel 97 sending fax using shortcuts 117 using the address book 117 sending fax at a scheduled time 118 sending fax using the address book 117

Serial port [x] disabled [56] 258 serial printing setting up 52

Set Date/Time menu 156

Index 335 setting

TCP/IP address 146 setting Hibernate Timeout 205 setting the fax number 115 setting the outgoing fax name 115 setting the paper size 53 setting the paper type 53 setting the Universal paper size 53 setting up e

‑ mail alerts 225 setting up fax country

‑ or region

‑ specific 111 digital telephone service 110

DSL connection 108 standard telephone line connection 104

VoIP connection 109 setting up fax and e

‑ mail functions 296 setting up serial printing 52

Settings menu 190 shipping the printer 224 shortcuts, creating e

‑ mail 96 fax destination 118, 119

FTP address 125

FTP destination 125 showing icons on the home screen 21 sides (duplex) copy options 93

Sleep Mode adjusting 205

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator. 258

SMTP Setup menu 151

Some held jobs were not restored 258 standard bin, using 63

Standard Network menu 144

Standard network software error

54] 259 standard tray loading 53

Standard USB menu 149

Standard USB port disabled

[56] 259 staple cartridge replacing 221 staple cartridges ordering 216 statement of volatility 209 status of parts checking 215 status of supplies checking 215 storing paper 72 supplies 217 storing print jobs 80 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 287 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 288 streaks appear 290 subject and message information adding to e

‑ mail 98

Substitute Size menu 137 supplies checking status 215 checking, from printer control panel 215 checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 215 conserving 203 storing 217 using genuine Lexmark 215 using recycled paper 203 supplies, ordering

ADF separator roller 216 imaging unit 216 maintenance kit 216 staple cartridges 216 toner cartridge 215

Supply needed to complete job 259 supply notifications configuring 226 supported flash drives 79 supported paper sizes 72

T

TCP/IP menu 146 telecommunication notices 315, 316, 317, 318 the scanner does not respond 302 tips card stock 69 labels, paper 68 letterhead 67 on using envelopes 67 transparencies 67 tips on using envelopes 67 toner cartridge ordering 215 replacing 217 toner cartridges recycling 208 toner darkness adjusting 77

Too many flash options installed

[58] 259

Too many trays attached [58] 259 touch screen buttons 18 transparencies copying on 85 loading, multipurpose feeder 58 tips 67 trays linking 64, 65 loading 53 unlinking 64, 65 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 307 cannot open Embedded Web

Server 307 checking an unresponsive printer 261 contacting customer support 308 fax and e

‑ mail functions are not set up 296 solving basic printer problems 261 the scanner does not respond 302 troubleshooting, color quality prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected 277 troubleshooting, copy copier does not respond 293 partial document or photo copies 295 poor copy quality 294 poor scanned image quality 305 scanner unit does not close 293, 304 troubleshooting, display printer display is blank 262 troubleshooting, fax caller ID is not shown 297 can receive but not send faxes 300 can send but not receive faxes 299 cannot send or receive a fax 297

Index 336 received fax has poor print quality 301 troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 267 troubleshooting, print error reading flash drive 268 held jobs do not print 270 incorrect characters print 272 incorrect margins on prints 279 jammed pages are not reprinted 267 job prints from wrong tray 272 job prints on wrong paper 272 jobs do not print 268

Large jobs do not collate 273 multiple

‑ language PDF files do not print 267 paper curl 280 paper frequently jams 266 print job takes longer than expected 271 tray linking does not work 273 unexpected page breaks occur 274 troubleshooting, print quality blank pages 275 characters have jagged edges 274 clipped pages or images 276 gray background on prints 278 horizontal voids appear on prints 289 print irregularities 281 print is too dark 283 print is too light 284 printer is printing solid black pages 286 repeating print defects appear on prints 282 shadow images appear on prints 277 skewed print 285 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 287 streaked vertical lines 288 toner fog or background shading 291 toner rubs off 292 toner specks appear on prints 291 transparency print quality is poor 287 uneven print density 292 white streaks on a page 290 troubleshooting, printer options internal option is not detected 263

Internal Solutions Port 265 memory card 265 tray problems 264

USB/parallel interface card 265 troubleshooting, scan cannot scan from a computer 306 partial document or photo scans 306 scan job was not successful 303 scanner unit does not close 293, 304 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 304

U

unacceptable paper 70 understanding the home screen buttons and icons 16 uneven print density 292

Unformatted flash detected

[53] 260

Universal Paper Size setting 53

Universal paper size setting 53

Universal Setup menu 142 unlinking trays 64, 65

Unsupported option in slot [x]

[55] 260

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 249

USB port 46

USB port [x] disabled [56] 260

USB/parallel interface card troubleshooting 265 using a shortcut number scanning to an FTP address 126 using Forms and Favorites 77 using Hibernate mode 205 using Schedule Power Modes 206 using shortcuts sending fax 117 using the address book 98 sending fax 117 using the Embedded Web

Server 13 using the ScanBack Utility 129 using the touch

‑ screen buttons 18

Utilities menu 196

V

verify print jobs 80 printing from a Macintosh computer 81 printing from Windows 81 vertical voids appear 290 viewing reports 225 viewing a fax log 120 virtual display checking, using Embedded Web

Server 225 voice mail setting up 104

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) fax setup 109 voids appear 290

VoIP adapter 109 volatile memory 209 erasing 209 volatility statement of 209

W

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator. 260 wiping the printer hard disk 210

Wireless menu 148 wireless network configuration information 48 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web

Server 51 wireless setup wizard using 49

X

XPS menu 197